0% found this document useful (0 votes)
120 views237 pages

NR-500 - Operator-Programming Manual v1.11

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 237

SAM4S NR-500 Series Electronic Cash Register

Operating and
Programming Manual

All specifications are subject to change without notice.


SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11
ATTENTION
The product that you have purchased contains a rechargeable Lithium battery. This battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life,
under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of the battery into the municipal waste system.
Check with your local solid waste officials for details concerning recycling options or proper disposal.

WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required
to take adequate measures.

NOTE
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Precaution Statements
Follow these safety, servicing and ESD precautions to prevent damage and to protect against potential hazards such as
electrical shock.

1-1 Safety Precautions


1. Be sure that all built-in protective devices are 7. Product Safety Notice:
replaced. Restore any missing protective shields. Some electrical and mechanical parts have special
2. When reinstalling the chassis and its assemblies, be safety-related characteristics that might not be
sure to restore all protective devices, including obvious from visual inspection. These safety
nonmetallic control knobs and compartment features and the protection they give might be lost
covers. if the replacement component differs from the
3. Make sure there are no cabinet openings through original - even if the replacement is rated for higher
which people - particularly children - might insert voltage, wattage, etc.
fingers and contact dangerous voltages. Such Components that are critical for safety are
openings include excessively wide cabinet indicated in the circuit diagram by shading, ( )
ventilation slots and improperly fitted covers and
or ( ). Use replacement components that have
drawers.
the same ratings, especially for flame resistance
4. Design Alteration Warning:
and dielectric strength specifications. A
Never alter or add to the mechanical or electrical
replacement part that does not have the same safety
design of the ECR. Unauthorized alterations might
characteristics as the original might create shock,
create a safety hazard. Also, any design changes or
fire or other hazards.
additions will void the manufacturer’s warranty.
CAUTION
5. Components, parts and wiring that appear to have
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
overheated or that are otherwise damaged should
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recomm-
be replaced with parts that meet the original
ended by the manufacturer. Dispose used batteries
specifications. Always determine the cause of
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
damage or over- heating, and correct any potential
ATTENTION
hazards.
ll y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
6. Observe the original lead dress, especially near the
incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec
following areas: sharp edges, and especially the
une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent
AC and high voltage supplies. Always inspect for
recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les
pinched, out-of-place, or frayed wiring. Do not
batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du
change the spacing between components and the
fabricant.
printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord
for damage. Make sure that leads and components
do not touch thermally hot parts.
1-2 Servicing Precautions
WARNING: First read the-Safety Precautions-section of this manual. If some unforeseen circumstance creates a
conflict between the servicing and safety precautions, always follow the safety precautions.
WARNING: An electrolytic capacitor installed with the wrong polarity might explode.

1. Servicing precautions are printed on the cabinet. 5. Check the insulation between the blades of the AC
Follow them. plug and accessible conductive parts (examples :
2. Always unplug the units AC power cord from the metal panels and input terminals).
AC power source before attempting to: 6. Insulation Checking Procedure: Disconnect the
(a) Remove or reinstall any component or power cord from the AC source and turn the power
assembly switch ON. Connect an insulation resistance meter
(b) Disconnect an electrical plug or connector (500V) to the blades of AC plug.
(c) Connect a test component in parallel with an The insulation resistance between each blade of the
electrolytic capacitor AC plug and accessible conductive parts (see
3. Some components are raised above the printed above) should be greater than 1 megohm.
circuit board for safety. An insulation tube or tape 7. Never defeat any of the B+ voltage interlocks. Do
is sometimes used. The internal wiring is not apply AC power to the unit (or any of its
sometimes clamped to prevent contact with assemblies) unless all solid-state heat sinks are
thermally hot components. Reinstall all such correctly installed.
elements to their original position. 8. Always connect an instrument’s ground lead to the
4. After servicing, always check that the screws, instrument chassis ground before connecting the
components and wiring have been correctly positive lead ; always remove the instrument’s
reinstalled. Make sure that the portion around the ground lead last.
serviced part has not been damaged.

1-3 Precautions for Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)

1. Some semiconductor (solid state) devices are easily 6. Use only an anti-static solder removal device.
damaged by static electricity. Such components Many solder removal devices are not rated as anti-
are called Electrostatically Sensitive Devices static; these can accumulate sufficient electrical
(ESDs); examples include integrated circuits and charge to damage ESDs.
some field-effect transistors. The following 7. Do not remove a replacement ESD from its
techniques will reduce the occurrence of protective package until you are ready to install it.
component damage caused by static electricity. Most replacement ESDs are packaged with leads
2. Immediately before handling any semiconductor that are electrically shorted together by conductive
components or assemblies, drain the electrostatic foam, aluminum foil or other conductive materials.
charge from your body by touching a known earth 8. Immediately before removing the protective
ground. Alternatively, wear a discharging wrist- material from the leads of a replacement ESD,
strap device. (Be sure to remove it prior to touch the protective material to the chassis or
applying power - this is an electric shock circuit assembly into which the device will be
precaution.) installed.
3. After removing an ESD-equipped assembly, place
9. Minimize body motions when handling
it on a conductive surface such as aluminum foil to
unpackaged replacement ESDs. Motions such as
prevent accumulation of electrostatic charge.
brushing clothes together, or lifting a foot from a
4. Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can
carpeted floor can generate enough static electricity
generate electrical charges that damage ESDs.
to damage an ESD.
5. Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron when
soldering or unsoldering ESDs.
Contents

Contents 5

Introduction 11
About the NR-500 Series ......................................................................................................... 11
Using This Manual .................................................................................................................. 12
Using Flowcharts ....................................................................................................... 12
Identifying Components & Connections ................................................................................. 13
Display ..................................................................................................................................... 16
Graphic Blue Backlit LCD ........................................................................................ 16
Printer/Printers ......................................................................................................................... 19
Control Lock ............................................................................................................................ 20
Keyboards ................................................................................................................................ 21
NR-5xxR Raised Keyboard Versions ........................................................................ 21
NR-5xx Flat Keyboard Versions ............................................................................... 21
Initial Clear .............................................................................................................................. 22

Getting Started 23
Quick Start Steps ..................................................................................................................... 23
Steps In this chapter: ................................................................................................. 23
Unpacking ................................................................................................................................ 23
Installing the Paper .................................................................................................................. 24
Clearing Memory ..................................................................................................................... 25

Operations 26
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 26
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 26
Function key Descriptions ....................................................................................................... 27
Clerk Operations ...................................................................................................................... 31
Clerk Sign On Instructions ........................................................................................ 31
Clerk Sign Off Instructions ....................................................................................... 31
Item Registrations .................................................................................................................... 32
Keyboard PLU Entries .............................................................................................. 32
Open Keyboard PLU Entry ....................................................................................... 32
Preset Price Keyboard PLU ....................................................................................... 33
Gallonage PLU Entry ................................................................................................ 33
Keyboard PLU Repeat Entry ..................................................................................... 34
Keyboard PLU Multiplication ................................................................................... 34
Keyboard PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point ................................................... 35
Split Pricing (Keyboard PLU) ................................................................................... 35

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Contents • 5


Single Item Keyboard PLU ....................................................................................... 36
Open Code Entry PLU............................................................................................... 36
Preset Price Code Entry PLU .................................................................................... 37
Code Entry PLU Multiplication ................................................................................ 37
Code Entry PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point................................................. 37
Split Pricing Code Entry PLU ................................................................................... 38
PLU Price Inquiry ..................................................................................................... 38
Modifier Key ............................................................................................................. 39
Price Level Key ......................................................................................................... 40
Promo ........................................................................................................................ 41
Waste ......................................................................................................................... 41
Shifting or Exempting Tax ...................................................................................................... 42
Shifting Tax ............................................................................................................... 42
Exempting Tax .......................................................................................................... 43
Percent Key Operations ........................................................................................................... 45
Preset Percent Discount on an Item ........................................................................... 45
Enter a Percent Discount on an Item ......................................................................... 45
Percent on Sale Total ................................................................................................. 46
Coupon on Sale (Vendor Coupon) ............................................................................ 46
Coupon on Item (Store Coupon) ............................................................................... 47
Return Merchandise Registrations ........................................................................................... 47
Voids and Corrections ............................................................................................................. 48
Error Correction (Void Last Item) ............................................................................. 48
Void Previous Item .................................................................................................... 48
Cancel ........................................................................................................................ 49
VOID MODE Operations .......................................................................................... 49
No Sale Operations .................................................................................................................. 50
Open Drawer ............................................................................................................. 50
Non Add Number ...................................................................................................... 50
Received On Account Operations............................................................................................ 51
Paid Out Operations ................................................................................................................. 52
Subtotaling a Sale .................................................................................................................... 52
Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru ............................................................................................. 52
Totaling and Tendering ............................................................................................................ 53
Totaling a Cash Sale .................................................................................................. 53
Totaling a Check Sale................................................................................................ 53
Tendering a Cash Sale ............................................................................................... 54
Tendering a Check Sale ............................................................................................. 54
Totaling a Charge Sale .............................................................................................. 55
Tendering a Charge Sale ........................................................................................... 55
Check Cashing ........................................................................................................... 56
Split Tender ............................................................................................................... 56
Post Tender ................................................................................................................ 57
Receipt On/Off and Receipt on Request.................................................................... 57
Currency Conversion ................................................................................................. 58
Scale Operations ...................................................................................................................... 59
Direct Scale Entry...................................................................................................... 60
Automatic Scale Entry............................................................................................... 60
Tare Weight Entry ..................................................................................................... 61
Manual Tare Weight Entry ........................................................................................ 61
Manual Weight Entry ................................................................................................ 62
Check Tracking Operations ..................................................................................................... 63
Overview ................................................................................................................... 63
Posting Balances Manually ....................................................................................... 65
Soft Check ................................................................................................................. 67
Hard Check ................................................................................................................ 70

6 • Contents SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Fast Food Drive Thru ................................................................................................ 72
Clerk Interrupt Operation......................................................................................................... 73
To Use Clerk Interrupt System .................................................................................. 73
Not Found PLU........................................................................................................................ 74
Not Found PLU List .................................................................................................. 74

Manager Mode (X Mode) 75


Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 75
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 75
Manager Mode/Report Mode................................................................................................... 76
X Reports ................................................................................................................................. 77
X Report Table of Available Reports ........................................................................ 78
Electronic Journal Operation ................................................................................................... 79
Declaration............................................................................................................................... 80
Training Mode ......................................................................................................................... 81
Stock Entry .............................................................................................................................. 82
Open Table .............................................................................................................................. 84
Save Report.............................................................................................................................. 84
Receipt On / Off....................................................................................................................... 84

Z-Mode 85
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 85
Accessing Z-Mode Functions .................................................................................................. 85
Z Reports ................................................................................................................................. 86
Reset Electronic Journal .......................................................................................................... 87
Reset Not Found PLU .............................................................................................................. 87
Available Z Reports................................................................................................... 88
Open Table .............................................................................................................................. 89

Service Mode Programming 90


Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 90
Overview ................................................................................................................................. 90
Accessing Service Mode Functions ......................................................................................... 91
Self Test ................................................................................................................................... 91
Memory Clear .......................................................................................................................... 93
Clear Totals ............................................................................................................... 93
Clear Grand Total ...................................................................................................... 93
Clear PLU File........................................................................................................... 93
Clear Price=0 ............................................................................................................. 93
Edit Counters ............................................................................................................. 94
Clear Non Mover ....................................................................................................... 94
Memory Allocation .................................................................................................................. 95
Function Key Assignment ....................................................................................................... 96
Define Port ............................................................................................................................... 98
Serial Port Setting ...................................................................................................... 98
USB Setting ............................................................................................................... 99
ECR Setup ............................................................................................................................. 100
ROM INFO.............................................................................................................. 100
Print Density ............................................................................................................ 100
LCD Contrast for 16-Character LCD ...................................................................... 100
LCD Contrast for Graphic LCD .............................................................................. 100
Set Network ............................................................................................................. 100
Program Backup and Restore ................................................................................................ 102
Program Backup ...................................................................................................... 102

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Contents • 7


Restore Program ...................................................................................................... 104
Saving Reports ........................................................................................................ 104
Load/Save Receipt Images ...................................................................................... 106
Saving Images ......................................................................................................... 107
Loading Images ....................................................................................................... 107
Flash ROM Updates ................................................................................................ 108
Flash ROM Update by SD ....................................................................................... 108
Flash ROM Update by PC ....................................................................................... 109
Help Menu ............................................................................................................... 111

Program Mode Programming 112


Descriptor Programming Methods......................................................................................... 113
Descriptor Overlay Method ..................................................................................... 113
Descriptor Code Method ......................................................................................... 115
Program Mode Menu ............................................................................................................. 117
PLU Programming ................................................................................................................. 118
Add/Change PLU .................................................................................................... 119
PLU Options - Reference Information .................................................................... 120
Delete PLU .............................................................................................................. 123
PLU STOCK ........................................................................................................... 124
NLU Code# Program............................................................................................... 125
Group Programming .............................................................................................................. 126
Function Key Programming................................................................................................... 128
#/NS Function Options ............................................................................................ 129
%1 -%5 Function Options ....................................................................................... 130
ADD CHECK Key Program Notes ........................................................................ 131
CANCEL Key Program Notes ................................................................................ 131
CASH Key Program Notes ...................................................................................... 132
CHARGE 1-8 Keys Program Notes ........................................................................ 133
CHECK Key Program Notes ................................................................................... 134
CHECK CASHING Key Program Notes ................................................................ 134
CHECK ENDORSEMENT Key Program Notes .................................................... 135
CHECK # Key Program Notes ................................................................................ 136
CURRENCY CONVERSION 1-4 .......................................................................... 137
EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, DRIVE THRU Key Program Notes ................................... 137
ERROR CORRECT Key Program Notes ................................................................ 138
GUEST Key Program Notes ................................................................................... 138
PRICE LEVEL 1-2 Key Program Notes ................................................................. 139
RETURN Key Program Notes ................................................................................ 139
MODIFIER 1-5 Key Program Notes ....................................................................... 140
PBAL Key Program Notes ...................................................................................... 140
PAID OUT 1-3 Keys Program Notes ...................................................................... 141
PRINT CHECK Key Program Notes ...................................................................... 141
PROMO Key Program Notes .................................................................................. 142
RECD ON ACCT 1-3 Keys Program Notes............................................................ 142
SCALE Key Program Notes .................................................................................... 143
SERVICE Key Program Notes ................................................................................ 143
SUBTOTAL Key Program Notes............................................................................ 144
TABLE Key Program Notes ................................................................................... 144
TARE Key Program Notes ...................................................................................... 144
TAX EXEMPT Key Program Notes ....................................................................... 145
TIP Key Program Notes .......................................................................................... 145
VOID Key Program Notes ...................................................................................... 146
WASTE Key Program Notes................................................................................... 146
ALPHA TEXT Key Program Notes ........................................................................ 146

8 • Contents SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


AUTO CASH 1-8 Keys Program Notes .................................................................. 147
PRICE CHANGE Key Program Notes.................................................................... 147
VALIDATION Key Program Notes........................................................................ 147
Macro Key Programming ...................................................................................................... 148
To Program a Macro ................................................................................................ 148
To Remove a Macro ................................................................................................ 149
Options Programming ............................................................................................................ 150
SYSTEM Options.................................................................................................... 151
PRINT Options ........................................................................................................ 155
REPORT Options .................................................................................................... 156
TAX Options ........................................................................................................... 159
CURRENCY Options.............................................................................................. 159
ROUNDING Options .............................................................................................. 159
LOGO Options ........................................................................................................ 160
KITCHEN PRINTER Options ................................................................................ 161
BARCODE Options ................................................................................................ 161
EJ Options ............................................................................................................... 162
TRAIN MODE Options .......................................................................................... 162
TABLE Options ...................................................................................................... 163
DETAIL PRINT Options ........................................................................................ 163
Employee Programming ........................................................................................................ 165
Clerk Programming - Reference Information .......................................................... 165
Time ....................................................................................................................................... 166
Time & Date ............................................................................................................ 166
Time Schedule ......................................................................................................... 166
Taxes Programming ............................................................................................................... 168
Programming an Add-On Tax Rate Percentage ...................................................... 168
Programming a VAT Tax (Value Added Tax) ........................................................ 169
Programming Canadian GST................................................................................... 170
Messages................................................................................................................................ 173
Postamble ................................................................................................................ 173
Endorsement ............................................................................................................ 174
Financial Report ...................................................................................................... 174
Clerk Report ............................................................................................................ 176
Datatran Message .................................................................................................... 180
Mix & Match Program........................................................................................................... 181
Program Scans ....................................................................................................................... 182

Sample Reports 183


Financial ................................................................................................................................ 183
Time ....................................................................................................................................... 187
PLU........................................................................................................................................ 188
Clerk ...................................................................................................................................... 189
Individual Clerk ..................................................................................................................... 190
Groups ................................................................................................................................... 191
Day ........................................................................................................................................ 192
Stock ...................................................................................................................................... 192
Check File .............................................................................................................................. 193
Drawer Totals ........................................................................................................................ 193
Balancing Formulas ............................................................................................................... 194

Integrated Payment Appendix 195


Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 195
What to Order? ........................................................................................................ 196

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Contents • 9


Configurations ....................................................................................................................... 197
Required ECR Program Settings ........................................................................................... 200
Define Port (Serial Port Options) ............................................................................ 200
System Options........................................................................................................ 201
Function Key Programming .................................................................................... 202
Load the EMV Parameters ...................................................................................... 205
Integrated Payment/EMV Operations .................................................................................... 205
Sample Transaction ................................................................................................. 205
Manual Card Entry .................................................................................................. 209
Merchandise Return................................................................................................. 210
Void Transaction ..................................................................................................... 212
EMV Related Datatran Operations ........................................................................................ 215
Accessing Z-Mode Functions .................................................................................. 215
Datatran Function .................................................................................................... 216
Datatran Function: Menu Operations ...................................................................... 216
Datatran Transaction ............................................................................................... 223
Datatran Transaction: Menu Operations .................................................................. 223
Tip (Gratuity) Entry................................................................................................. 226
TIP Entry at Time of Sale ........................................................................................ 227
Important Notes: .................................................................................................................... 229

Glossary 230

Manual Revision Record 237

10 • Contents SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Introduction

About the NR-500 Series


Congratulations! You have selected a very flexible electronic cash register designed for years of
reliable service. NR-500 Series will fit many shops and restaurants, providing fast transaction
processing, security, and detailed sales information.
The NR-500 Series features a unique operator screen that allows you to view itemized transaction
information, as well as providing on screen programming that is simple and easy to use. This manual
includes in instructions for all models. The keyboard and printer configuration define the model type.
All other features are same, unless otherwise noted.

Single Printer Station Two Printer Stations


(Receipt Printer) (Receipt and Journal Printers)

NR
-510

Flat Keyboard
(90 Keys)

NR-510 NR-520
Receipt Printer Receipt and Journal Printers
Flat Keyboard Flat Keyboard

NR NR
-510 -520
R R

Raised Keyboard
(48 Keys)

NR-510R NR-520R
Receipt Printer Receipt and Journal Printers
Raised Keyboard Raised Keyboard

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Introduction • 11


Using This Manual
This manual provides you with a means to use your SAM4S cash register to its fullest potential. It is
divided into seven sections:
1. “Getting Started” on page 23 provides quick start steps to help you get up and running for
basic applications.
2. “Operations” on page 26 guides you through basic operation sequences.
3. “Manager Mode (X Mode)” on page 75 explains manager controlled functions, along with X
reports and balancing information.
4. “Z-Mode” on page 85 explains how to reset register reports as well as other functions
performed in the S-Mode: mix & match discounts, PLU lookups and DataTran operations.
5. “Service Mode Programming” on page 90 provides instructions for secure programming –
usually done by the installing dealer prior to installation.
6. “Program Mode Programming” on page 112 provides complete programming instructions,
including PLU, function key programs, and options. This section is recommended for use by
storeowners and managers. Call your SAM4S dealer if you find you need programming
assistance.
7. “Sample Reports” on page 183 provides a sample of each register report.
The SAM4S NR-500 Series allows many different user applications. This manual was written with
this in mind. Although we have tried to touch on all available options, your specific application may
differ.
If you have questions concerning the configuration of your NR-500 Series, please contact your
authorized SAM4S dealer.

Using Flowcharts
Flowcharts are used to supplement step-by-step instructions throughout this manual. For example,
the following flowchart describes how to register $1.00 into the PLU1 key:

1 0 0 1

This flowchart means:


Press numeric key 1.
Press numeric key 0.
Press numeric key 0.
Press PLU #1.
Follow the flowchart from left to right, pressing the keys in the order they are shown. Numeric
keypad entries are shown as square keys. PLU and function keys are shown as rectangular keys.

12 • Introduction SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Identifying Components & Connections
Identifying Components

Journal Printer
Only NR-520/520R Customer Rear Display

Receipt printer
Operator Display
16-character blue backlit LCD
Keyboard
or
- Flat keyboard: Graphic blue backlit LCD
NR-500 Series
- Raised keyboard:
NR-500R Series Control Lock

Power On/Off

Connections
(Serial, RJ45, USB,
Ethernet (option))

Cash
Drawer

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Introduction • 13


Inserting External SD Card

• The SD slot is located in the printer compartment. Remove the printer cover.
• Remove the security screw to access the slot.
• Insert or Remove the SD card.

Connections
• The Serial port can be connected to PC, Scanner, Kitchen Printer Scale and Pole
display.
• The USB (Device and Host) port can be connected to PC, scanner or memory device.
• If you want to know more details, See page 99 for USB specification.
• The Ethernet port(LAN) is option.

14 • Introduction SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Programmable Features
• Memory Allocation System Supports:
 Over 3,200 Price Look Ups (PLU’s) are available
 Up to 99 clerks with separate report totals
 Up to 99 PLU Group totals
 Up to 2 Price levels for each PLU
 Electronic Journal
 Hard or Soft Guest Checks
• Up to 5 PLU modifier keys (i.e. small, medium, and large)
• 24-character programmable descriptors for PLU’s and functions
• Four tax rates with value added tax (VAT) and ADD-ON capability.
• Programmable functionality for each key location
• 24-hour real-time clock with automatic day and date change
• Check, Cash, and up to 8 charge tender functions
• Currency conversion capability for up to 4 foreign currencies
• Training mode
• Programmable discount/surcharge/coupon keys
• Error Correct, Void, and Cancel Transaction functions
• Function keys for posting charges and payments to accounts or guest checks
• Macro, Price Inquiry, Promo and Waste functions
• Management X and Z reports
• Electronic Journal capability
• 6-line programmable preamble and postamble messages
• Programmable descriptors for financial and clerk reports
• Up to 100 Mix & Match discounts

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Introduction • 15


Display
The operator display of NR-500 Series comes with a 192 x 64 Graphic blue backlit LCD or 2 Line
16-character blue backlit LCD.
As items are registers, the item description will display on the first line; price and quantity
information will display on the second line. Additional information and error messages will display
as appropriate, and may be accompanied by an error tone.
Note: This manual has been described on basis of Graphic LCD model.

Graphic Blue Backlit LCD


REGISTER MODE
Note: The “CLOSED” message will display if a clerk is not signed on.
R : O N C LER K 00 K1 P1

REGISTER MODE
CLOSED

R : O N C LER K 01 K1 P1

REGISTER MODE

VOID MODE
Note: The “CLOSED” message will display if a clerk is not signed on.
R : O N C LER K 00 K1 P1

VOID MODE
CLOSED

R : O N C LER K 01 K1 P1

VOID MODE

16 • Introduction SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


MANAGER MODE (X)
R : O N C LER K 00 K1 P1

MANAGER MODE
CLOSED

• Press the CASH to display X MODE menu.


X M OD E
1 . X R E POR T S 
2 . D EC L ARA T I ON
3 . F LA S H R E P OR T
4 . S ET TRA I N M O DE
5 . S TO C K E N T RY
6 . S AV E RP T SD
- P A GE 1/2 -

X M OD E
7 . R CP T ON / O FF 

- P A GE 2/2 -

• Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm.
• You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.

Z-MODE
Z M OD E
1 . Z R E POR T S 
2 . R ES E T E . J
3.RESET NOT FOUND PLU LIST
4 . C ON N ECT S ER V ER
5 . D AT A TRA N FU N CTI O N
6 . D AT A TRA N TR A NSA C T IO N
- P A GE 1/1 -

• Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm.
• You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Introduction • 17


PROGRAM MODE (P)
P R O GR A M M O D E
1 . P LU 
2 . G RO U P
3 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
4 . O PT I ONS
5 . E MP L OYE E
6 . T IM E
- P A GE 1/2 -

P R O GR A M M O D E
7 . T AX E S 
8 . M ES S AGE S
9 . M IX & M A T CH
1 0 . PG M SC A N

- P A GE 2/2 -

• Press the ↑ key and ↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm.
• You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.

SERVICE MODE (S)


S E R VI C E M O D E
1 . S EL F TE S T 
2 . M EM O RY C L EA R
3 . A LL O CAT I O N
4 . K EY ASS I G N
5 . D EF I NE P O RT
6 . E CR SET U P
- P A GE 1/2 -

S E R VI C E M O D E
7 . P RO G RAM B AC K UP 
8 . H EL P ME N U

- P A GE 2/2 -

• Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm.
• You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.

18 • Introduction SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Printer/Printers
For information about loading paper into the printer, refer to the section “Installing the paper” which
can be found on page “24”.

NR-510 Series (1 Station)


NR-510 and NR-510R Models feature a single receipt printer.

Receipt printer

NR-520 Series (2 Station)


NR-520 and NR-520R Models feature separate receipt and journal printers.

Journal printer

Receipt printer

Printer Specifications
Paper 58mm Thermal Paper
Paper Loading: Drop-in Loading
Paper Diameter: 70 Ø_max
Normal 50mm/s
Print Speed:
Max 70mm/s
Paper end sensor YES

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Introduction • 19


Control Lock
The control lock has 7 positions, accessed with 5 keys. Each ECR is shipped with two full sets of
keys.
VOID Use to void (correct) items outside of a sale.
OFF OFF The register is inoperable.
VOID REG
REG Use for normal registrations.
X X Use to read register reports.
Z Use to read register reports and reset totals to zero.
Z
PGM Use to program the register.
PGM
S The S position is a hidden position reserved for dealer
access.
S

Before performing any operations in Register Mode, a clerk must be signed on. See “Clerk Sign-
On/Sign-Off” for a description of clerk operations.

Control Keys
All NR-500 Series models include two sets of keys that may be used to access the following control
lock positions.

Key Positions Accessible


REG OFF, REG
VD VOID, OFF, REG, X
Z VOID, OFF, REG, X, Z
P VOID, OFF, REG, X, Z, PGM
C ALL POSITIONS

Note: Keys may be removed from the control lock in the OFF or REG positions.

20 • Introduction SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Keyboards

NR-5xxR Raised Keyboard Versions


The NR-500R Series keyboard is shown below with the default legends and key assignments. This
configuration has 12 keyboard NLU locations.

RCPT PLU RECD


RCPT
FEED
ON/OFF
C#
CLERK
F^
X/TIME
I/
7 8 9 M] 4 Q: 8 U; 12
(PAGE ↑)
W?
ACCT
(PAGE ↓)
Z■

CHARGE PAID
%1
SPACE B@
%2 %3
E% H*
#/NS 4 5 6 L[ 3 P* 7 T, 11 V=
1 OUT
(↑)
Y

TAX1 SUB CHECK


SHIFT
DOUBLE
CANCEL
A!
RETURN
D$ G&
VOID 1 2 3 K) 2 Q+ 6 S 10
TOTAL
SHIFT X
(↓)

MACRO MACRO MACRO


1
BACK
2
CAPS
3 CLEAR 0 00 . J( 1 N- 5 R 9
CASH / TEND
ENTER

NR-5xx Flat Keyboard Versions


The NR-500 Series keyboard is shown below with the default legends and key assignments. This
configuration has 60 keyboard NLU locations.

■ 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 PAID
RCPT RECD CLERK#
#/NS OUT
FEED ACCT (PAGE↓)
1 7 13 (PAGE↑)

! @ # $ % ^ & * ( )
RCPT TAX1
CLEAR PLU X/TIME
ON/OFF SHIFT
2 8 14 20 26 32 38 44 50 56

Q W E R T Y U I O P
CHARGE
3 9 15 21 27 33 39 45 51 57
CANCEL 7 8 9 (↑)

A S D F G H J K L ;
CHECK
4 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58
%1 4 5 6 (↓)

Z X C V B N M ’ . /
SUB
5 11 17 23 29 35 41 47 53 59
%2 1 2 3 TOTAL

+ - < > ? = CAPS DOUBLE SPACE BACK


CASH
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54
SPACE
60
%3 0 00 . ENTER

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Introduction • 21


Initial Clear
CAUTION: Do not share this information with unauthorized users. This procedure will not
affect register programming, or clear previously stored totals in RAM memory.
The initial clear function allows you to exit any register activity and return to a beginning or cleared
state. Any transaction that is in progress will be exited and totals for that transaction will not be
updated.
Here are some reasons you may want to perform an initial clear:
• The register is in an unknown state, and you wish to exit the current program or transaction
without following normal procedures.
• You have performed a function that includes a compulsory activity and you wish to bypass
the compulsion.
• An initial clear may be necessary as part of servicing or troubleshooting.
Perform this procedure only as necessary. Contact your SAM4S dealer first if you have questions
about operating or programming your SAM4S NR-500 Series.

To Perform an Initial Clear:


1. Move to the PROGRAM MODE.
2. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the SUBTOTAL key is located on the default
keyboard layout.
4. While continuing to hold the SUBTOTAL key, turn the power switch to the ON position.
When the “INITIAL CLEAR” message displays release the SUBTOTAL key.

I N IT I AL C L EA R
E N T ER CAS H KE Y

5. Press the CASH key.

A R E Y O U S U R E?
Y = CA S H N = C LE A R

6. Press the CASH key. The message "INITIAL CLEAR OK!” prints when the initial clear is
complete. To resume operations, you will need to sign on a clerk.

22 • Introduction SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Getting Started

Quick Start Steps


SAM4S ECRs are designed to work out-of-the-box. You can sign on a clerk, enter amounts and
finalize a sale. Most functions are active and ready to use.
Use the Quick Start Instructions provided here to prepare your NR-500 Series ECR for entering a
program. Because the NR-500 Series features on-screen programming, the dealer or user can simply
follow the menus presented when the mode is moved to the PROGRAM MODE. Detailed
programming steps and reference information is found in the Program section of this manual.

Steps In this chapter:


1. Unpacking
2. Installing the Paper
3. Clearing All Memory

Unpacking
1. Unpack and unwrap the cash register.
2. Locate in the packing the following items:
a. Paper roll(s)
3. Plug the register into a grounded outlet, turn the power switch on.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Getting Started • 23


Installing the Paper
1. Remove the printer cover.
2. Lift up to open the paper cover.
3. Ensure that the paper is being fed from the bottom of the roll and then close the paper cover
slowly until it locks firmly.
4. Pass the leading edge of the paper through the tear-bar slot. Tear off the excess paper.
Replace the printer cover.

24 • Getting Started SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Clearing Memory
Before you use your NR-500 Series ECR for the first time, you must perform a memory all clear to
ensure that all totals and counters are cleared and that the default program is installed.
CAUTION: The procedures described in this area are security sensitive. Clearing the NR-500
Series memory after the register is put into service will erase all programming as well as totals and
counters. Do not share this information with unauthorized users and distribute the “SERVICE
MODE” access key only to those you may want to perform these functions.
NOTE: The NR-500 has EMV Integrated Payment capability; An SD card is required for EMV. If not
using EMV, press CLEAR to Bypass the ‘SD Required’ error message when clearing memory.
1. Move to the SERVICE MODE.
2. Turn the power switch located on the right side of the register to the OFF position.
3. Press and hold the key position where the CHECK key is located on the default keyboard
layout.
4. Continue to hold the appropriate key while turning the power switch to the ON position. The
message “RAM ALL CLEAR" displays.
5. Press the Upper Left key of the keyboard, then the Lower Left key, then the Upper Right
key, and finally press the Lower Right key.

<NR-500R Series Raised Keyboard>

1 3

CHECK
(↓ )

2 4
PRICE PRICE

<NR-500 Series Flat Keyboard>


1 3

CHECK
(↓ )

2 . 4

6. The SERVICE MODE menu displays. The RAM Clear procedure is complete and the receipt
prints.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Getting Started • 25


Operations

Introduction
NR-500 is designed for easy sale operation. You just need to select numbers and PLU’s for sales
operation without any unnecessary work. You can also operate easier by using Program Mode.

Overview
The following procedures are done from the Register Mode menu:
♦ Clerk Operations
♦ Item Registrations
♦ Shifting or Exempting Tax
♦ Percent Key Operations
♦ Return Merchandise Registrations
♦ Voids and Corrections
♦ No Sale Operations
♦ Received On Account Operations
♦ Paid Out Operations
♦ Subtotaling a Sale
♦ Eat in / Take Out / Drive Thru Sales
♦ Totaling and Tendering
♦ Check Tracking Operations
♦ Not Found PLU

26 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Function key Descriptions
Keys are listed in alphabetical order. Many of the keys described below are not included on the
default keyboard. See “Function Key Assignment” on page 96 to add or change programmable keys.

Function key Description


#/NS Use as a non-add key to print a numeric entry (up to 8-digits) on the receipt and journal.
This entry will not add to any sales totals. The #/NS key is also used to open the cash
drawer without making a sale.
X/TIME Use to multiply a quantity of items or calculate split pricing on PLU entries.
00, Use to make numeric entries in REG, X, Z, VOID, or P positions. The decimal key is
0-9, used for decimal or scale multiplication, when setting or entering fractional percentage
discounts, or when programming fractional tax rates. Do not use the decimal key when
DECIMAL making amount entries into PLU’s.
ADD CHECK Use to combine individual trays (such as in a cafeteria situation). Each tray subtotal can
advance the consecutive number, depending on programming.
CANCEL Cancels a transaction without updating PLU, or function key totals. The Cancel function
may only be used prior to tendering. Once tendering begins, the Cancel function may no
longer be used. The CANCEL key corrects the appropriate totals and counters and the
Financial report records total of transactions canceled.
CASH Use to finalize cash sales. Calculates the sale total including tax and opens the cash
drawer. Change computation is allowed by entering an amount before pressing the
CASH key. The cash drawer will open only if the amount tendered is equal to or greater
than the total amount of the sale. Post tendering is also available should a second change
calculation be necessary. Re-enter the tendered amount and press the CASH key to show
the new change computation.
Press the CASH key a second time to issue a buffered receipt when the receipt on/off
function is OFF.
CHECK CASHING Use to exchange a check for cash. Cash-in-drawer and check-in-drawer totals are
adjusted.
CHECK Use to print a check endorsement message on an optional slip printer. A programmable
ENDORSEMENT message up to 10 lines can also be printed.
CHECK Use to finalize check sales. Calculates the sale total including tax, finalizes the sale, and
opens the cash drawer. Change computation is allowed by entering an amount before
pressing the CHECK key. The cash drawer will open only if the amount tendered is
equal to or greater than the total amount of the sale. Change issued will be subtracted
from the cash-in-drawer total.
CHECK# The CHECK # key is used to begin a new or access an existing balance (hard check) or
itemized bill (soft check.) Check track numbers that are entered manually may be set at
a fixed length of one to nine digits. Check track numbers assigned automatically will
begin with #1. Existing checks are accessed by entering the check track number and
pressing the CHECK # key.
CHARGE (1-8) Use to finalize charge sales. Calculates the sale total including tax, finalizes the sale, and
opens the cash drawer. Change computation is allowed by entering an amount before
pressing the CHARGE key. The cash drawer will open only if the amount tendered is
equal to or greater than the total amount of the sale. Change issued will be subtracted
from the cash-in-drawer total.
CLEAR Use to clear entries made into the 10-key numeric pad or X/TIME key before they are
printed. Also used to clear error conditions.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 27


Function key Description
CLERK The register will not operate in register mode unless a clerk has been signed on. Direct
or secret code sign on procedures accomplishes clerk sign-on.
All entries made on the register will report to one of the 10 clerk totals. When a clerk is
signed on, all entries following will add to that clerk’s total until another clerk is signed
on.
To sign a clerk off, enter 0 (zero) and then press the CLERK key. The “CLOSED”
message displays. The register cannot be operated until another clerk is signed on. The
current clerk must first be signed off before another clerk may be signed on.
CONV (1-4) The currency conversion function, allowed after subtotal, converts and displays the new
subtotal at a preprogrammed exchange rate. Tendering is allowed after using the
currency conversion function. Change is calculated and issued in home currency. The
amount of foreign currency tendered is stored in a separate total on the Financial report,
but not added to the drawer total.
EAT-IN Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru are subtotal functions. In areas that have different tax
TAKE OUT rules for eat-in and take out sales, the EAT-IN, TAKE OUT and DRIVE THRU keys
can be programmed to automatically charge or exempt taxes.
DRIVE THRU
Sales may not be split between Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru.
The EAT-IN, TAKE OUT and DRIVE THRU keys maintain separate totals on the
Financial report.
ERROR CORR Use to correct the last entry. The ERROR CORR key corrects the appropriate totals
and counters.
GUEST Use to enter the count of guests served as part of a guest check. The entry of a guest
count can be enforced when opening a guest check, or for all transactions.
LEVEL (1-2) Price Level keys shift the price PLU that is being registered. Levels can be stay down;
pop-up after each item to register, for example large, medium or small soft drink; pop-up
after each transaction to register, for example, toppings of various pizza sizes.
MACRO (1-10) Macro keys may be programmed to record, and then later perform, up to 50 keystrokes.
For example, a macro key could be set to tender (preset tender) a common currency, such
as $5 into the cash key.
RETURN Used to return or refund merchandise. Returning an item will also return any tax that
may have been applied.
RECEIPT ON/OFF When 'OFF' no receipt will print during a sale. (If the receipt is off, a buffered receipt is
available by pressing the CASH key a second time.)
MODIFIER (1-5) A modifier key alters the next PLU registered, either by changing the code number of the
PLU so that a different item is registered, or by adding the modifier descriptor (and not
changing the code of the subsequent PLU.)
PAID OUT (1-3) Use to record money taken from the register to pay invoices, etc. The paid out amount
subtracts from the cash-in-drawer total. Paid outs are allowed outside of a sale only.
PBAL Use to enter the amount of an outstanding balance. The PBAL key will take the recall
function if the drive thru feature is enabled in CHECK # key programming.
%1 - %5 Up to five % keys may be placed on the keyboard. Each % key is set with a specific
function, such as item discount or surcharge, or sale discount or surcharge. The percent
rate may be entered or preprogrammed, or the percent keys can be programmed with a
negative open or preset price, thus acting as coupon keys.
PLU The PLU key is used to register price lookups by number entry. PLU’s can be
programmed open or preset, and positive or negative.

28 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Function key Description
PRINT CHECK Use to print a guest check. The check can be printed on an optional (RS-232C) printer or
can be printed on the receipt printer. The PRINT CHECK key can be set to
automatically service the check.
PRICE CHANGE Use to change the price of a PLU in register mode.
PRICE INQUIRY Use to display the price of a PLU without registering the price.
PROMO The PROMO key allows you to account for promotional items, as in "buy two, get one
free". Pressing this key will remove an item's cost from the sale but will include the sale
of the item in the item's sales counter.
FEED Advances the receipt paper one line, or continuously until the key is released.
RECD ACCT (1-3) The RA (received on account) key is used to record media loaned to the cash drawer, or
payments received outside of a sale. The cash drawer will open. The amount received
adds to the cash-in-drawer total.
SCALE Use to make weight entries. When a scale is attached, press the scale key to show the
weight in the display, then press (or enter) a PLU to multiply the weight times the price.
When a scale is not attached, you can manually enter the weight (using the decimal key
for fractions). PLU’s may be programmed to require an entry through the scale key.
SERVICE Use to temporarily finalize Previous Balance or check tracking transactions.
SUBTOTAL Displays subtotal of sale including tax. Must be pressed prior to a sale discount or sale
surcharge.
TABLE You can enforce the entry of a table number for guest check transactions, or for all
transactions. If you are tracking guest check balances, the balance can be recalled either
by entering the check number or the table number.
TARE Tares are container weights. If you are using the scale function, you can preset up to 5
different tare weights. The tare is subtracted automatically when a specific PLU is
registered, or the tare can be subtracted by manually inputting the tare number and
pressing the TARE key. Tare #5 can be programmed for entering tare weights manually.
TAX EXEMPT Press the TAX EXEMPT key to exempt tax 1, tax 2, tax 3, and/or tax 4 from the entire
sale.
TAX SHIFT (1-4) When pressed before a PLU entry, the tax shift keys reverse the tax status of the PLU,
i.e., a PLU with non-tax status would become taxable or a PLU with tax status would
become non-taxable.
TIP The TIP key allows a gratuity to be added to a guest check before payment. The tip
amount is deducted from the Cash-in-Drawer amount for the Clerk/Cashier closing the
guest check.
The TIP key may be programmed as either a percentage or amount. If programmed as a
percentage, tax programming defines whether the percentage is calculated on the net
amount, or the amount after taxes.
VOID Use to correct an item entered earlier within a sale. The VOID key corrects the
appropriate totals and counters. To correct the last item, use the ERROR CORR key.
For void operations outside of a sale (Transaction Void), use the VOID MODE. The
Financial report records totals for each type of void separately.
WASTE Allows control of inventory by accounting for items that must be removed from stock
due to spoilage, breakage or mistakes. Press the WASTE key before entering wasted
items, and then press the WASTE key again to finalize. The WASTE key may be under
manager control, requiring the mode to be in the MANAGER MODE. The WASTE key
is not allowed within a sale.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 29


Function key Description
VALIDATION Press to initiate a single line validation. Note that an optional printer with validation
capability must be attached to the NR-500 and identified.

30 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Clerk Operations
The number of clerks available is determined by memory allocation. (The default configuration
provides 10 clerks.) See “ALLOCATION” in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter to set the
number of clerks as well as other memory variables.
You can choose a Direct sign-on or code entry clerk system:
• You can provide maximum security in a multiple clerk system with the code entry system.
Enter the clerk secret code, and then press the CLERK key to sign on the register.
• You can sign off a clerk by entering 0, then pressing the CLERK key.
You can also select stay down or pop-up mode for clerk operation:
• Stay down means that once a clerk is signed on, the same clerk will remain signed on until
the clerk signs off. A stay down clerk system might be used when only one operator uses the
register at a time and a different operator begins when a work shift is changed.
• Pop-up means that the clerk is automatically signed off at the end of each transaction. To
begin a transaction, you must first sign a clerk on. A pop-up clerk system might be used in a
department store, where several clerks use the register during the same shift and clerk sales
information is required.
See “SYSTEM Options” of “Options Programming” in the “Program Mode Programming” chapter to
set clerk options.

Clerk Sign On Instructions


When a clerk is not signed on, the message "CLOSED" is shown on the display. Note that the current
clerk must be signed off before a new clerk can be signed on.

Direct Sign-on

CLERK#

Clerk # (1-10)

Code Entry

CLERK# CLERK#

Clerk Code (up to 6 digits)

Clerk Sign Off Instructions


0 CLERK#

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 31


Item Registrations
All registrations are accumulated into PLU’s. Keyboard PLU’s are fixed keys on the keyboard (like
traditional department keys) that access specific PLU’s.
• Traditional code-entry PLU’s can also be registered by entering the PLU number and
pressing the PLU key.
• If optional scanning is implemented, the PLU number corresponds to the UPC number and a
PLU is registered when an item is scanned.
As you make item registrations, you can follow your entries by viewing the display. Remember that
the sale and tax totals are updated automatically with each entry.

Keyboard PLU Entries


As you make PLU registrations, you can follow your entries by viewing the display.
In the following examples:
• PLU1 is programmed with a preset price of $1.99 and is taxable by Tax 1.
• PLU2 is programmed for open entries.
• PLU3 is programmed with a preset price of $2.99 and is taxable by Tax 1.
• PLU5 is programmed with a preset price of $1.29 and is taxable by Tax 1.
• PLU6 is programmed with a single item of $6.00.
• Tax 1 is programmed at 6%.

Open Keyboard PLU Entry


1. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
THANK-YOU
not use the decimal key. For example, for
CALL AGAIN
$2.99, enter:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2 9 9

PLU1 T1 $2.99
2. Press a PLU key. Example: press PLU 1:
TAX1 $0.18
TOTAL $3.17
1 CASH $3.17
CLERK 01 000011 00001

32 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Preset Price Keyboard PLU
A preset PLU registers the price that was previously programmed for the PLU. See “PLU
Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program preset prices.

1. Press a preset PLU key. For example,


THANK-YOU
press PLU 5:
CALL AGAIN

5 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU5 $1.29
TOTAL $1.29
CASH $1.29
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Gallonage PLU Entry


1. Enter the total fuel purchase on the ten-key
THANK-YOU
pad. Do not use the decimal key. For
CALL AGAIN
example, for $20.00, enter:

2 0 0 0 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Press a PLU key set to gallonage function. GAL CNT #5.26


For example, press PLU 7: GAL AMT @ 3.799
PLU7 $20.00

7
TOTAL $20.00
CASH $20.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 33


Keyboard PLU Repeat Entry
Open or preset price PLU’s can be repeated as many times as necessary by pressing the same PLU
again. The number of times the item is repeated is shown on the display.
1. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
THANK-YOU
not use the decimal key. For example, for
CALL AGAIN
$2.99, enter:

2 9 9 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Press a PLU key. Example: press PLU 1: PLU1 T1 $2.99


PLU1 T1 $2.99
TAX1 $0.36
1
TOTAL $6.34
3. To register a second item exactly as the CASH $6.34
first, press the PLU key a second time. For SUNNY 000011 00001
example, press PLU 1:

Keyboard PLU Multiplication


When several of the same items are to be entered into the same PLU, you can use multiplication. You
can enter a quantity (1 to 999.999) using the X/TIME key. You can multiply open or preset PLU’s.
1. Enter the quantity of items being
THANK-YOU
purchased; press the X/TIME key. For
CALL AGAIN
example, enter 4 on the numeric key pad
and press the X/TIME key:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
4 X/TIME
4X @1.99
2. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do PLU1 T1 $7.96
not use the decimal key. For example, for TAX1 $0.48
$1.99, enter: TOTAL $8.44
CASH $8.44
1 9 9 SUNNY 000011 00001

3. Press a PLU key. For example:


press PLU 1:

34 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Keyboard PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point
If you are selling items by weight, or if you are selling yard goods, you can use the X/Time key to
multiply a fraction of a unit.
1. Enter the amount with the decimal point;
THANK-YOU
press the X/TIME key. For example, for
CALL AGAIN
$3.75 of produce, enter:

3 . 7 5 X/TIME 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do 3.75X @0.99


not use the decimal key. For example, if PLU1 T1 $3.71
the price is $0.99 per pound, enter: TAX1 $0.22
TOTAL $3.93
9 9 CASH $3.93
CLERK 01 000011 00001
3. Press a PLU key. For Example:
press PLU 1:

Split Pricing (Keyboard PLU)


When items are priced in groups, i.e. 3 for $1.00, you can enter the quantity purchased and let the
register calculate the correct price.
1. Enter the quantity purchased; press the
THANK-YOU
X/TIME key. For example, enter:
CALL AGAIN
2 X/TIME
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. Enter the quantity of the group price; press
the X/TIME key. For example, if the 2@3FOR @1.00
items are priced 3 for $1.00, enter: PLU1 T1 $0.67
TAX1 $0.04
3 X/TIME TOTAL $0.71
CASH $0.71
3. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. For CLERK 01 000011 00001
example, if the items are priced 3 for
$1.00, enter:

1 0 0

4. Press a PLU key. For example:


press PLU 1:

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 35


Single Item Keyboard PLU
Single item PLU’s automatically total as a cash sale immediately after registration. Use single item
PLU’s for speedy one item sales. For example, if you are selling admission tickets, and all ticket
sales are one item sales, you can use an open or preset PLU. After each registration, the drawer will
immediately open, and a separate transaction receipt is printed. See “PLU Programming” in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to program a single item PLU.

1. Press a single item preset PLU key (or


THANK-YOU
enter a price and press a single item open
CALL AGAIN
PLU key.) For example, press PLU 6:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
6
PLU6 $1.29
TOTAL $1.29
CASH $1.29
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Open Code Entry PLU


If the PRESET status of a PLU is set to N (no), the PLU will operate as an open PLU.
See “PLU Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to program PLU descriptors
and options.

1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU key.


THANK-YOU
For example, enter:
CALL AGAIN
2 PLU
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. The display will prompt "ENTER PRICE".
Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do PLU2 T1 $2.99
not use the decimal key. For example, for TAX1 $0.18
$2.99, enter: TOTAL $3.17
CASH $3.17
2 9 9 CLERK 01 000011 00001

3. Press the PLU key again.

PLU

36 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Preset Price Code Entry PLU
1. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU key.
THANK-YOU
For example, enter:
CALL AGAIN
1 PLU
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU1 $1.29
TOTAL $1.29
CASH $1.29
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Code Entry PLU Multiplication


When several of the same items are to be entered into the same PLU, you can use multiplication. You
can enter a quantity (1 to 999.999) using the X/TIME key. You can multiply open or preset PLU’s.
1. Enter the quantity of items being
THANK-YOU
purchased; press the X/TIME key. For
CALL AGAIN
example, enter 4 on the numeric key pad
and press the X/TIME key:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
4 X/TIME
4X @1.99
2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU key. PLU1 T1 $7.96
For example, enter: TAX1 $0.48
TOTAL $8.44
1 PLU CASH $8.44
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Code Entry PLU Multiplication with Decimal Point


If you are selling items by weight, or if you are selling yard goods, you can use the X/Time key to
multiply a fraction of a unit.
1. Enter the quantity with the decimal point;
THANK-YOU
press the X/TIME key. For example, for
CALL AGAIN
$3.75 of produce, enter:

3 . 7 5 X/TIME 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU key. 3.75X @2.99
For example, enter: PLU3 T1 $11.21
TAX1 $0.67
3 PLU TOTAL $11.88
CASH $11.88
CLERK 01 000011 00001

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 37


Split Pricing Code Entry PLU
When items are priced in groups, i.e. 3 for $1.00, you can enter the quantity purchased and let the
register calculate the correct price.

1. Enter the quantity purchased, press the


THANK-YOU
X/TIME key. For example, enter:
CALL AGAIN
2 X/TIME
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. Enter the quantity of the group price, press
the X/TIME key. For example, if the 2@3FOR @2.99
items are priced 3 for $1.00, enter: PLU3 T1 $1.99
TAX1 $0.12
3 X/TIME TOTAL $2.11
CASH $2.11
3. Enter the PLU number; press the PLU key. CLERK 01 000011 00001
For example, enter:

3 PLU

PLU Price Inquiry


You can check the price of a PLU without registering the PLU by placing a price inquiry function key
on the keyboard.
SCREEN EXAMPLE:
1. Press the PRICE INQ key. The message
HAMBURGER
"PRICEINQ" displays:
1 : 1.25
PRICE
INQ
2. Press a preset PLU key, or enter a PLU
number and press the PLU key:

1 0 0 1 PLU

3. The PLU descriptor and price display on


the screen. If the PLU has prices at more
than one price level, all prices will be
shown.
4. Press CLEAR to remove the price
information from the screen or enter the
PLU again to register the item.

38 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Modifier Key
Pressing a modifier key alters the next PLU registered, either by changing the code number of the
PLU so that a different item is registered, or by just adding the modifier descriptor and registering the
same PLU. See “MODIFIER 1-5” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter in order to
determine how the modifier key will affect the PLU entry.
Modifiers can be:
• Stay Down - so that registrations will be modified by the same modifier until another modifier
is selected,
• Pop-Up after each item - to register, for example large, medium or small soft drink, or
• Pop-Up after each transaction - to register the same modification for the item until the
transaction is finalized.
See the “SYSTEM Options” settings in “Options Programming” in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter to select stay down/pop-up status.

Pop-Up Modifier Key Affecting PLU Code


1. Press a preset PLU key. For example,
THANK-YOU
press PLU 1 with a price of $1.00.
CALL AGAIN

1 07/20/2015 MON 08:33


2. Press the MOD 1 key. The message
"MOD1" displays. PLU1 $1.00
MOD1
MOD #1001 $1.25
1
PLU2 $1.50
3. Press the same PLU key. In this example TOTAL $3.75
the modifier 1 will add the digit 1 to the CASH $3.75
fourth PLU # position, resulting in the CLERK 01 000011 00001
registration of PLU #1001.

4. Press another PLU key. In this example


press PLU 2 with a price of $1.50.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 39


Price Level Key
If you choose to use the price level feature, you must allocate memory for each level. See
“ALLOCATION” in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter. Note that the default program
selects one price level. You must also place price level keys on the keyboard. See “Function Key
Assignment” in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter.
If you use this feature, the same PLU can be given up to 2 different preset prices. Price Level keys
shift the price that is being registered. Levels can be:
• Stay Down - so that registrations will stay in the selected level until another level is selected,
• Pop-Up after each item - to register, for example large, medium or small soft drink,
• Pop-Up after each transaction - to register the same level until the transaction is finalized.
See “SYSTEM Options” of “Options Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter
to set how the price level keys operate.

Pop-Up Price Level Keys


1. Press a preset PLU key. For example,
THANK-YOU
press PLU 1 programmed with a price of
CALL AGAIN
$1.00 for price level 1.
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
1

2. Press the LEVEL 2 key. The message PLU1 $1.00


"LEVEL 2" displays. PLU1 $2.00
PLU2 $1.50
LEVEL TOTAL $4.50
2
CASH $4.50
3. Press the same PLU key. In this example CLERK 01 000011 00001
the PLU 1 key is programmed with a price
of $2.00 for price level 2.

4. Press another PLU key. In this example


press PLU 2 programmed to register PLU
#2 with price level 1. Note that the level 1
price is registered.

40 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Promo
The PROMO key allows you to account for promotional items, as in "buy two, and get one free".
Pressing this key will remove an item's cost from the sale, and the promo item will not be added to
the PLU sales total, but it is added to the item sales counter. If stock (inventory) reporting is used, the
item will be subtracted from inventory.

1. Register an item. For example, press PLU


THANK-YOU
1 programmed with a price of $1.00 for
CALL AGAIN
price level 1.
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
1

2. Press the PROMO key. The message PLU1 $1.00


"PROMO" displays. ***PROMO***
PLU1
PROMO TOTAL $0.00
CASH $0.00
3. Enter the item you want to promo. (You CLERK 01 000011 00001
cannot enter an item that has not been
already registered in this transaction.)

Waste
The WASTE key allows control of inventory by accounting for items that must be removed from
stock due to spoilage, breakage or mistakes. Press the WASTE key before entering wasted items,
and then press the WASTE key again to finalize. The WASTE key may be under manager control,
requiring the mode to be in the MANAGER MODE. The WASTE key is not allowed within a sale.

1. Press the WASTE key. The message


THANK-YOU
"WASTE" displays at the top of the
CALL AGAIN
screen.

WASTE 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Enter the item or items that are wasted. ***WASTE***


3. Press the WASTE key again to total the PLU1 $1.25
wasted items: PLU2 $1.50
***WASTE***
WASTE TOTAL $2.75
CLERK 01 000011 00001

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 41


Shifting or Exempting Tax
Shifting Tax
PLU’s can be programmed to automatically add the appropriate tax or taxes. Occasionally, you may
need to sell a normally taxable item without tax, or a normally non-taxable item with tax. You can
perform this tax shifting with one of the four tax shift keys.

1. Press the tax shift for the tax you wish to


THANK-YOU
shift. For example, Press TAX SHIFT 1:
CALL AGAIN
TAX 1
SHIFT 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
not use the decimal key. For example, for PLU1 $2.99
$2.99, enter: TOTAL $2.99
CASH $2.99
2 9 9 CLERK 01 000011 00001

3. Press a PLU key. For example, press PLU


1. If PLU 1 is normally taxable by tax 1,
the registration will be non-taxable.

42 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Exempting Tax
Occasionally, you may need to exempt tax from an entire sale. For example, you might remove all
state and local taxes when you sell merchandise to a church or charitable institution.
You can exempt tax by using the tax shift keys and the SUBTOTAL key, or you can use the TAX
EXMT (tax exempt) function key.

Exempting Tax with Tax Shift Keys


1. Enter an amount on the ten-key pad. Do
THANK-YOU
not use the decimal key. For example, for
CALL AGAIN
$2.99, enter:

2 9 9 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Press a taxable PLU key. For example, PLU1 T1 $2.99


press PLU 1: TOTAL $2.99
CASH $2.99
CLERK 01 000011 00001
1

3. Press SUBTOTAL:
SUB
TOTAL

4. Press the tax shift key (or keys) that


represents the tax you wish to shift. For
example, to exempt tax 1 press
TAX SHIFT 1, then press SUBTOTAL:
TAX 1 SUB
SHIFT TOTAL

5. The display reflects the transaction without


added taxes; Total the sale with CASH,
CHECK, or CHARGE. The sale will not
include Tax1.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 43


Exempting Tax with the Tax Exempt Key
You can program the TAX EXEMT function to remove all or selected taxes.

1. Enter an amount on the ten-key-pad. Do


THANK-YOU
not use the decimal key. For example, for
CALL AGAIN
$2.99, enter:

2 9 9 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Press a taxable PLU key. For example, PLU1 T1 $2.99


press PLU 1: TOTAL $2.99
CASH $2.99
CLERK 01 000011 00001
1

3. Press SUBTOTAL:
SUB
TOTAL

4. Press the TAX EXMT key (or access the


TAX EXMT function from a function
look up menu key):
TAX
EXMT
5. The display reflects the transaction without
added taxes. Total the sale with CASH,
CHECK, or a CHARGE function. The
sale will not include tax1.

44 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Percent Key Operations
A total of five % functions are available. (%1) is located on the default keyboard of the NR-500
Series. Each function is individually programmable to add or subtract, from an individual item or
from a sale total, amounts (coupons) or percentages. You can also program the percentage key
taxable or non-taxable, so that sales taxes are calculated on the net, or the gross amount of the item or
sale. You can also program preset prices or percentages.
The operation examples in this section show the percentage key in a variety of configurations. See
“Function Key Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to assign a specific
function to each percentage key.

Preset Percent Discount on an Item


In this example the%1 function is preset with a rate of 10 %.
1. Register the item.
THANK-YOU
2. Press the %1 key:
CALL AGAIN
%1
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. The discount is automatically subtracted. PLU2 $10.00


% 1 -10.000%
AMOUNT -1.00
TOTAL $9.00
CASH $9.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Enter a Percent Discount on an Item


You can also operate the percentage functions by entering the percentage of the discount or
surcharge. If necessary, you can enter a fractional percentage up two 3 digits beyond the decimal (i.e.
99.999%).
1. Register the discounted item.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the percentage. If you are entering a
CALL AGAIN
fraction of a percent, you must use the
decimal key. For example, for one third
off enter: 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3 3 . 3 3 3 PLU2 $10.00
% 1 -33.333%
3. Press the %1 key: AMOUNT -3.33
TOTAL $6.67
%1 CASH $6.67
CLERK 01 000011 00001

4. The discount is automatically subtracted.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 45


Percent on Sale Total
The percent can be an open or preset amount. In this example an open percentage surcharge of 15%
is applied.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press the SUBTOTAL key:
CALL AGAIN
SUB
TOTAL
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Enter the percentage, press the appropriate PLU2 $10.00


discount key. For example, for 15% enter: % 1 15.000%
AMOUNT $1.50
1 5 %1 TOTAL $11.50
CASH $11.50
CLERK 01 000011 00001
4. The surcharge is automatically added.

Coupon on Sale (Vendor Coupon)


When programmed as "amount", "sale", "open" and "negative", a % key will perform a coupon
against a sale (or vendor coupon.) Also, depending upon programming:
• You may be allowed to enter only one coupon in a sale, after the SUBTOTAL key is pressed,
• You may be allowed to enter multiple coupons, but you must press the SUBTOTAL key
before each coupon entry, or
• You may be allowed to enter multiple coupons, without first pressing SUBTOTAL.
In this example, a coupon may be entered only once, and you must first press SUBTOTAL.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press the SUBTOTAL key:
CALL AGAIN
SUB
TOTAL
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Enter the amount of the coupon, press the PLU2 $10.00


appropriate % key. For example: %1 -2.00
TOTAL $8.00
2 0 0 %1 CASH $8.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

4. The coupon is subtracted.

46 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Coupon on Item (Store Coupon)
When programmed as "amount", "item", "open" and "negative", a % key will perform a coupon
against an item (or store coupon.) In this case, you must press the PLU (or enter the PLU number) of
the PLU you wish the coupon to be subtracted from.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Enter the amount of the coupon, press the
CALL AGAIN
appropriate % key. For example:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2 0 0 %1

PLU1 $10.00
3. Press the PLU key you wish to subtract the PLU1 C -2.00
coupon from (or enter the PLU number of TOTAL $8.00
the PLU you wish to subtract the coupon CASH $8.00
from and press PLU.) CLERK 01 000011 00001

4. The coupon is automatically subtracted.

Return Merchandise Registrations


If you wish to return or refund an item, press MDSE RETURN, then re-enter any item. You can
return merchandise as part of a sale, or you can return merchandise as a separate transaction and
return cash to the customer.

1. Press RETURN:
THANK-YOU
RETURN CALL AGAIN

07/20/2015 MON 08:33


2. Enter the price of the item you wish to
return, then press the PLU key where it ************ RETURN ***********
was registered originally. PLU2 T1 -2.99
TAX1 AMT -0.18
2 9 9
2 TOTAL -3.17

3. Total the sale with CASH, CHECK, or a


CASH -3.17
CLERK 01 000011 00001
CHARGE function.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 47


Voids and Corrections
Error Correction (Void Last Item)
This function corrects the last item entered.

1. Register the item you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press the ERROR CORR key:
CALL AGAIN
ERROR
CORR
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU1 T1 $2 29
PLU2 $1.29
ERR CORR --------------------
PLU2 -1.29
TAX1 AMT $0.14
TOTAL $2.43
CASH $2.43
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Void Previous Item


This function allows you to correct an item registered previously in a transaction.

1. Register an item. Then register a second


THANK-YOU
item.
CALL AGAIN
2. To correct the first item, press VOID:

VOID 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU2 $1.29
3. Enter the price of the first item; then press PLU1 T1 $2.29
the PLU key where it was registered VOID ------------------------
originally. PLU2 -1.29
TAX1 AMT $0.14
1 2 9
2 TOTAL $2.43
CASH $2.43
CLERK 01 000011 00001

48 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Cancel
The CANCEL key allows you to stop any transaction. Anything registered within the transaction
before the CANCEL key is pressed is automatically corrected. The CANCEL key can be inactivated
through programming, see “Function Key Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming"
chapter, or the key can be programmed to require manager control.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press the CANCEL key.
CALL AGAIN
CANCEL
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU1 T1 $2.29
PLU2 $1.50
CANCEL ***********************
CLERK 01 000011 00001

VOID MODE Operations


You can use the VOID MODE to correct any complete transaction. To correct any transaction:
1. Move to the VOID MODE.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the transaction you wish to correct
CALL AGAIN
exactly as it was entered originally in the
REGISTER MODE. You can enter
discounts, voids, returns, tax exemptions 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
or any other function.
3. All totals and counters are corrected as if ********* VOID MODE *********
the original transaction did not take place. PLU1 T1 -2.29
PLU2 -1.00
TAX1 AMT -0.14
TOTAL -3.43
CASH -3.43
CLERK 01 000011 00001

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 49


No Sale Operations
Open Drawer
The #/NO SALE key will open the cash drawer when you have not already started a transaction. The
no sale function can be disabled or placed under manager control through programming, see
“Function Key Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.

1. Press #/NS:
THANK-YOU
#/NS CALL AGAIN

2. The drawer will open, and the receipt will 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
print as in the example on the right.
NO SALE -----------------------
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Non Add Number


You can also use the #/NO SALE key to print any number (up to 9 digits) on the printer paper. You
can enter the number any time during a transaction. For example, if you wish to record a checking
account number, enter the number and press the #/NO SALE key before totaling the sale with the
CHECK key.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Enter the number you wish to record, for
CALL AGAIN
example enter:

1 2 3 4 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Press #/NS: PLU1 T1 $2.99


NON-ADD# 123456789
#/NS TAX1 AMT $0.18
TOTAL $3.17
4. Press CHECK: CHECK $3.17
CLERK 01 000011 00001
CHECK

50 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Received On Account Operations
You can use one of the received on account functions (RA1-RA3) to accept cash or checks into the
cash drawer when you are not actually selling merchandise. For example, use received on account to
accept payments for previously sold merchandise or record loans to the cash drawer.

1. Press one of the received on account keys


THANK-YOU
(RA1-RA3).
CALL AGAIN
RA1
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Enter the amount of cash received, press RA1


CASH. CASH $10.00
CHECK $10.00
1 0 0 0 CASH
CHARGE $10.00
RA1 $30.00
3. Enter the check amount received, press
CLERK 01 000011 00001
CHECK.

1 0 0 0 CHECK

4. Enter the charge amount received, press


CHARGE.

1 0 0 0 CHARGE

5. You can continue to itemize receipts, or


you can finalize by pressing or selecting
the same received on account key.

RA1

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 51


Paid Out Operations
You can use the PAID OUT function to track cash or checks paid out or to record loans from the
cash drawer.

1. Press one of the paid out keys (PO1-PO3).


THANK-YOU
PO1 CALL AGAIN

07/20/2015 MON 08:33


2. Enter the amount of cash paid out, press
CASH. PO1
CASH -10.00
1 0 0 0 CASH
CHECK -10.00
PO1 -20.00
3. Enter the check amount paid out, press
CLERK 01 000011 00001
CHECK.

1 0 0 0 CHECK

4. You can continue to itemize paid outs, or


you can finalize by pressing or selecting
the same paid out key.

PO1

Subtotaling a Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
2. Press SUBTOTAL. The subtotal will display with the message "SUBTOTAL"
indicated on the rear display.
SUB
TOTAL

The subtotal can be printed if the print option is set. See “PRINT Options” of “Options
Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.

Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru


Different types of sales such as "Eat In", "Take Out" and "Drive Thru" can be categorized by placing
the separate destination keys on the keyboard. Eat-In, Take Out and Drive Thru keys function as
subtotal keys. Separate totals will be maintained on the financial report to detail sales counts and
amounts for each key.
Note: Eat-In, Take-Out and Drive-Thru keys can be programmed to exempt taxes to
accommodate areas where food is taxed differently.

52 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Totaling and Tendering
There are ten tender functions available to categorize sales. CASH and CHECK are individual keys
on the keyboard.
Depending upon how your register is programmed you might find charge keys as individual function
keys on the keyboard.

Totaling a Cash Sale


1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
2. To total a cash sale, press CASH:
CALL AGAIN
CASH
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
3. The display will indicate the total amount
of the cash sale. PLU2 $7.96
TOTAL $7.96
CASH $7.96
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Totaling a Check Sale


1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
2. To total a cash sale, press CHECK:
CALL AGAIN
CHECK
07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. The display will indicate the total amount PLU2 $7.96


of the cash sale. TOTAL $7.96
CHECK $7.96
CLERK 01 000011 00001

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 53


Tendering a Cash Sale
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the amount tendered by the
CALL AGAIN
customer. For example, for $20.00 enter:

2 0 0 0 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Press CASH: PLU1 T1 $2.99


PLU1 T1 $2.99
CASH 4X @1.99
PLU2 $7.96
4. The display will indicate the total amount TAX1 $0.36
of the cash tendered and the change due, if TOTAL $14.30
any. CASH $20.00
CHANGE $5.70
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Tendering a Check Sale


1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the amount tendered by the
CALL AGAIN
customer. For example, for $20.00 enter:

2 0 0 0 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Press CHECK: PLU1 T1 $2.99


PLU1 T1 $2.99
CHECK 4X @1.99
PLU2 $7.96
TAX1 $0.36
4. The display will indicate the total amount
of the check tendered and the change due,
TOTAL $14.30

if any. CHECK $20.00


CHANGE $5.70
CLERK 01 000011 00001

54 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Totaling a Charge Sale
Use the charge keys to track charge or credit card sales. See “Function Key Programming” in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to change the descriptors for the charge tender functions. For
example, you can use CHARGE 1 to track Visa card sales. The descriptor "VISA" will display on the
screen and print on the printer. You can also set tendering options for the charge keys, i.e. whether to
allow over tendering or to enforce tendering.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press one of the charge keys if it is located
CALL AGAIN
on the keyboard:

CHARGE 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU1 T1 $2.99
PLU1 T1 $2.99
4X @1.99
PLU2 $7.96
TAX1 $0.36
TOTAL $14.30
CHARGE $14.30
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Tendering a Charge Sale


Tendering a charge sale may or may not be allowed. See “Function Key Programming” in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to set tendering options for the charge keys, i.e. whether to
allow over tendering or to enforce tendering.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Enter the amount of the charge and press
CALL AGAIN
one of the charge keys if it is located on
the keyboard:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2 0 0 0 CHARGE
PLU1 T1 $2.99
PLU1 T1 $2.99
4X @1.99
PLU2 $7.96
TAX1 $0.36
TOTAL $14.30
CHARGE $20.00
CHANGE $5.70
CLERK 01 000011 00001

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 55


Check Cashing
Check cashing means exchanging cash for a check. If you wish to cash checks, you must place a
CHKCASH key on the keyboard. See “Function Key Assignment” in the "Service Mode
Programming" chapter.

1. Enter the amount of the check tendered by


THANK-YOU
the customer. For example, for $20.00
CALL AGAIN
enter:

2 0 0 0 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Press CHKCASH: ***CHKCASH***


CHECK $20.00
CHK CASH -20.00
CASH
CLERK 01 000011 00001
3. The display will indicate the amount of the
check and the cash change.

Split Tender
Split tendering is paying for one transaction by more than one payment method. For example, a
$20.00 sale could be split so $10.00 is paid in cash, and the remaining $10.00 is paid by a check. If
necessary, you can make several different payments.
Note: By default, CASH and/or CHECK under tenders are allowed. This can be changed
through function key programming.
1. Register the items you wish to sell.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the amount of cash tendered by the
CALL AGAIN
customer. For example, enter $10.00 and
press CASH:
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
1 0 0 0 CASH
PLU2 $20 00
The display will indicate the $10.00 cash TOTAL $20.00
tender and the $10.00 total still due. CASH $10.00
TOTAL $10.00
3. Enter the amount of check tendered by the
CHECK $10.00
customer. For example, enter $10.00 and
CLERK 01 000011 00001
press CHECK:

1 0 0 0 CHECK

4. When the total tendered equals or exceeds


the total due, the receipt will print, and the
transaction is complete.

56 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Post Tender
Post tendering means computing change after the sale has been totaled and the drawer is open. This
feature is useful when a customer changes the amount of the tender or when a "quick change artist"
confuses a clerk. Normally, this function is not allowed. If you wish to allow post tendering, you
must set the appropriate options program. See “SYSTEM Options” of “Options Programming” in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter. (A separate system option determines whether the drawer
opens on the post tender.)

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press CASH:
CALL AGAIN
CASH
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
3. The display will indicate the total of the
cash sale. PLU1 T1 $2.00
4. Enter the amount of the new tender, Press TAX1 $0.12
CASH: TOTAL $2.12
CASH $2.12
2 0 0 0 CASH CLERK 01 000011 00001

5. The display will indicate the change due.

Receipt On/Off and Receipt on Request


When a receipt is not normally issued, you can turn the receipt function off. See "Receipt On/Off" in
the "Manager Mode (X Mode)" chapter.
If the receipt is off, you can still issue a receipt after the sale has been completed.

Printing a Receipt after the Sale


After the sale has been totaled, but before the next transaction is started, press CASH:
CASH

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 57


Currency Conversion
If you normally accept currency from neighboring nations, you can program the NR-500 Series to
convert the subtotal of a sale to the equivalent cost in the foreign currency. You can set up to four
separate conversion functions for different foreign currencies. To do this, you need to program the
conversion factor. For example, if the US dollar (home currency) is worth 1.3720 Canadian dollars
(foreign currency), the conversion factor is 1.3720. See “Function Key Programming” in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter to set a conversion factor.

1. Register the items you wish to sell.


THANK-YOU
2. Press the CONV1 key if it is located on
CALL AGAIN
the keyboard:

CONV1 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

PLU1 T1 $2.00
3. The amount due in foreign currency is TAX1 $0.12
displayed. TOTAL $2.12
4. Enter the amount of the foreign currency CONV 1 ¥2.90
tender, Press CASH:
CHANGE RATE @1.3720
1 0 0 0 CASH HOME AMT. $10.00
CHANGE $5.17
CLERK 01 000011 00001
5. The display will indicate the amount of
foreign currency tendered and display
$5.17 change due. The change due is The currency symbol you
computed in home currency! program will display here.
See “System Options → PRINT
Options" in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.

58 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Scale Operations
The NR-500 Series can be interfaced to an optional load-cell scale. The scale interface allows direct
entry of an item's weight using the SCALE function. You can also choose "manual entry" scale
operation if you are working with a standalone scale that is not interfaced to the cash register.
• PLU’s must be set to "scalable" status to allow scale multiplication. If you attempt an entry
into a PLU that has been programmed "scalable", an error tone will sound and the message
“REQ SCALE” will display.
• PLU’s can be set to "auto scale" status to speed up scale entries by automatically retrieving
the weight on the scale and multiplying it times the amount entered.
A tare is the amount of weight accounted for by the container or packaging. By entering a tare weight
(as required by law in some areas) the weight of the container is subtracted and only the true weight
of the product is measured on the scale. By entering the tare number (1-5) the operator can
automatically subtract the predetermined container weight when a product is on the scale.
• PLU’s can be set to "auto tare" status to automatically subtract one of the preprogrammed
tare weights when the PLU is registered.

Refer to the "Service Mode Programming" and "Program Mode Programming" chapters to set your
scale options. See:
• “Define Port” to attach a scale to one of the ports.
• “Function Key Assignment” to place SCALE and TARE keys on the keyboard.
• “Function Key Programming” to set options for the SCALE and TARE keys.
• “PLU Programming” to set scalable, auto scale, or auto tare status.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 59


Direct Scale Entry
Place a product on the scale and access the SCALE function to display the weight on the cash
register. Then make the appropriate entry; the PLU must have "scalable" status setting.

1. Place an item on the scale.


THANK-YOU
2. Press the SCALE key.
CALL AGAIN
SCALE
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
3. Note that the weight is displayed on the
screen. Enter the price per pound on the 1.50 lb @3.00/lb
ten-key pad. Do not use the decimal key. PLU1 $4.50
For example, for $3.00, enter: TAX1 $0.27
TOTAL $4.77
3 0 0 CASH $4.77
CLERK 01 000011 00001
4. Press a PLU key.
For example, press PLU 1:

Automatic Scale Entry


Place a product on the scale and make the appropriate PLU entry. The PLU must be set as “scalable’
and “auto scale” in the PLU status settings.

1. Place an item on the scale. THANK-YOU


2. Press a PLU key, if the item is a preset CALL AGAIN
item, or enter the price per pound on the
ten-key pad. Do not use the decimal key. 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
For example, for $3.00, enter:
1.50 lb @3.00/lb
3 0 0 PLU1 $4.50
TAX1 $0.27

3. Press a PLU key. TOTAL $4.77


For example, press PLU 1: CASH $4.77
CLERK 01 000011 00001

60 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Tare Weight Entry
1. Place an item on the scale. THANK-YOU
2. Enter the preprogrammed tare number. CALL AGAIN
Press the TARE key.
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
1 TARE
1.50 lb @3.00/lb
3. Press the SCALE key. PLU1 $4.50
TAX1 $0.27
SCALE TOTAL $4.77
CASH $4.77
4. Note that the weight, less the tare weight, CLERK 01 000011 00001
is displayed on the screen. Enter the price
per pound on the ten-key pad. Do not use
the decimal key. For example, for $3.00,
enter:

3 0 0

5. Press a PLU key.


For example, press PLU 1:

Manual Tare Weight Entry


1. Place an item on the scale.
THANK-YOU
2. Enter the manual tare number, 5. Press the
CALL AGAIN
TARE key:

5 TARE 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Enter the weight of the tare, for example, 1.50 lb @3.00/lb


enter .01, press the tare key: PLU1 $4.50
TAX1 $0.27
. 0 1 TARE TOTAL $4.77
CASH $4.77
4. Press the SCALE key. CLERK 01 000011 00001

SCALE

5. Note that the weight, less the tare weight,


is displayed on the screen. Enter the price
per pound on the ten-key pad. Do not use
the decimal key. For example, for $3.00,
enter:

3 0 0

6. Press a PLU key.


For example, press PLU 1:

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 61


Manual Weight Entry
Note: Manual weight entry is allowed only when a scale is not connected, and the Serial port is not
set to the scale function. Manual Weight is also used when voiding or returning a scale item without
using the scale.
Operators can make manual weight entries if the item has been programmed to accept them. You
must use the decimal key to enter fractional manual weights.

1. Place an item on the scale.


THANK-YOU
2. Enter the weight using the decimal key for
CALL AGAIN
fractional weights. Press the SCALE key:

1 . 5 SCALE 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3. Enter the price per pound on the ten-key 1.500 lb MANUAL WT. @3.00/lb
pad. Do not use the decimal key. For PLU1 $4.50
example, for $3.00, enter: TAX1 $0.27
TOTAL $4.77
3 0 0 CASH $4.77
CLERK 01 000011 00001
4. Press a PLU key.
For example, press PLU 1:

62 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Check Tracking Operations
Overview
The NR-500 Series can employ a manual previous balance, hard check, or soft check system. (You
must select hard or soft check posting in memory allocation programming - the default selection is
soft.)
• If manual previous balance is selected, the check balance is not saved in memory and is input
manually by the operator (use the PBAL key).
• If a hard check system is selected, only the previous balance is maintained in memory.
• If a soft check system is selected, the check detail is kept in memory until the check is paid.
(The maximum size of the soft check is set in memory allocation programming.)

Options
For hard or soft check operations, the following tracking options are available:
• Tracking by manually entering the check number. (The number of digits in the check number
may be set from 0-9, with zero meaning no fixed length.)
• Tracking by automatically assigning a check number. The starting check is always #1.
• Enforcing entry of a table number, where a check number is also assigned, allows the check
balance to be recalled by either the check or table number. Multiple checks may be assigned
at the same table. (If there are multiple checks assigned to the same table, an attempt to recall
by table number will recall the check with the lowest number.)
• The check number can be scanned from a printed bar code. For example, a bar code can be
printed on a customer identification badge.
For soft check operations, the following option is available:
• Consolidation of like items can be selected for guest check printing. For example, if three
rounds of drinks are served, the check will print "3 TAP BEER" rather than "1 TAP BEER"
three times.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 63


Function Keys for Check Tracking
Although none of the functions necessary for check tracking operations appear on the default
keyboard, any or all of the following functions can be located on the keyboard:

CHECK # The CHECK # key is used to begin a new or access an existing balance
(hard check) or itemized bill (soft check.)
Check track numbers that are entered manually may be set at a fixed
length of one to nine digits. Check track numbers assigned automatically
will begin with #1.
Existing checks are accessed by entering the check track number and
pressing the CHECK# key. In a drive thru system, simply pressing the
PBAL key will recall the oldest open balance (lowest check track#).
GUEST Use to enter the count of guests served as part of a guest check. The entry
of a guest count can be enforced when opening a guest check, or for all
transactions.
P/BAL Use to enter the amount of an outstanding balance. The P/BAL key will
take the recall function if the drive thru feature is enabled in CHECK #
key programming.
SERVICE Use to temporarily finalize Previous Balance or check tracking
transactions. (If you are using a hard check system, you must program the
SERVICE key for the port where the slip printer is connected.)
TABLE You can enforce the entry of a table number for guest check transactions,
or for all transactions. If you are tracking guest check balances, the
balance can be recalled either by entering the check number or the table
number.
PRINT CHECK Use to print a guest check. The check can be printed on an optional (RS-
232C) printer or can be printed on the receipt printer. The PRINT
CHECK key can be set to automatically service the check.
TIP The TIP key allows a gratuity to be added to a guest check before
payment. The tip amount is deducted from the Cash-in-Drawer amount
for the Clerk/Cashier closing the guest check.
The TIP key may be programmed as either a percentage or amount. If
programmed as a percentage, tax programming defines whether the
percentage is calculated on the net (taxable = no) amount, or the amount
after taxes.

See “Function Key Assignment” in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter to place the functions
necessary for your application. See “Function Key programming” in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter to set the options for each function.

64 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Posting Balances Manually
Opening a Check
1. Enter the previous balance (if this is the
THANK-YOU
first posting, enter 0) press the PBAL key:
CALL AGAIN
0 PBAL
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. Register the items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE: PBAL $0.00
PLU2 $1.00
SERVICE SERVICE $1.00
BFWD $1.00
4. Place a slip in an optional slip printer, CLERK 01 000011 00001
press the PRINT CHECK key.

Adding to a Check
1. Enter the previous balance, press the
THANK-YOU
PBAL key:
CALL AGAIN
1 0 0 PBAL
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. Register the next items you wish to sell.
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE: PBAL $1.00
PLU3 $2.00
SERVICE SERVICE $2.00
BFWD $3.00
4. Place a slip in an optional slip printer, CLERK 01 000011 00001
press the PRINT CHECK key.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 65


Paying a Manual Balance
1. Enter the previous balance, press the
THANK-YOU
PBAL key:
CALL AGAIN
3 0 0 PBAL
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
2. If necessary, add additional items. If you
wish to add a tip, press SUBTOTAL, then PBAL $3.00
enter the tip amount and press the TIP TIP $0.50
key: CHECKS PAID $3.50

SUB
CASH $10.00
TOTAL CHANGE $6.50
CLERK 01 000011 00001

5 0 TIP

3. Pay the balance as you would normally


tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
functions. If the tender is greater than the
balance due, change is displayed:

1 0 0 0 CASH

4. Place a slip in an optional slip printer,


press the PRINT CHECK key.

66 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Soft Check
Opening a Soft Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Receipt Example:
the CHECK # key:
THANK-YOU
1 2 3 CHECK# CALL AGAIN

or, press the CHECK # key to automatically 07/20/2015 MON 08:33


assign a check:
CHECK # #123
CHECK#
TABLE #3
GUEST #2
2. If required, enter the table number and CHICKEN $7.00
press the TABLE key:
STEAK $10.00
SERVICE $17.00
3 TABLE
BFWD $17.00
3. If required, enter the number of guests and CLERK 01 000011 00001
press the GUEST key:

2 GUEST

4. Register the items you wish to sell.


5. To total the posting, press SERVICE:

SERVICE

Note: If a table number entry is required for all guest checks, and checks are assigned by
register, the check will be assigned by the register when the table # is entered.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 67


Adding to a Soft Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Receipt Example:
the CHECK # key:
THANK-YOU
1 2 3 CHECK# CALL AGAIN

or, if you entered a table number, enter the 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
table number and press the TABLE key:
CHECK # #123
3 TABLE
TABLE #3
GARLIC BREAD $2.00
2. Register the next items you wish to sell. SERVICE $2.00
3. To total the posting, press the SERVICE BFWD $19.00
key.
CLERK 01 000011 00001
SERVICE

Printing a Soft Check


1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Sample of soft check printed on an
the CHECK # key: optional printer:

1 2 3 CHECK# THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
or, if you entered a table number, enter the
table number and press the TABLE key: 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

3 TABLE CHECK # #123


TABLE #3
2. Press PRINT CHECK to print the CHICKEN $7.00
complete check. If programmed to do so, STEAK $10.00
the PRINT CHECK key will
GARLIC BREAD $2.00
automatically service the check: SERVICE $0.00
PRINT BFWD $19.00
CHECK CHK # : 1
CLERK 01 000011 00001

The number of times each check


has been printed is counted and
printed on the check

68 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Paying a Soft Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Sample of soft check printed on the
the CHECK # key: receipt:

1 2 3 CHECK# THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
or, if you entered a table number, enter the
table number and press the TABLE key: 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
3 TABLE
CHECK # #123
2. If necessary, add additional items. If you TABLE #3
wish to add a tip, press SUBTOTAL, then TIP $3.00
enter the tip amount and press the TIP CHECKS PAID $22.00
key: TOTAL $22.00

SUB
CASH $25.00
TOTAL CHANGE $3.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

3 0 0 TIP

3. Pay the balance as you would normally


tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
functions. If the tender is greater than the
balance due, change is displayed.

2 5 0 0 CASH

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 69


Hard Check
Opening a Hard Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Receipt Example:
the CHECK # key:
THANK-YOU
1 2 3 CHECK# CALL AGAIN

or, press the CHECK # key to automatically 07/20/2015 MON 09:15


assign a check:
CHECK# CHECK # #123
PBAL $0.00
2. If required, enter the table number and TABLE #3
press the TABLE key: GUEST #2
CHICKEN $7.00
3 TABLE STEAK $10.00
SERVICE $17.00
3. If required, enter the number of guests and BFWD $17.00
press the GUEST key: CLERK 01 000011 00001

2 GUEST

4. Register the items you wish to sell.


5. Place a slip in an optional slip printer, the
check will print automatically when you
press SERVICE:

SERVICE

Adding to a Hard Check


1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Receipt Example:
the CHECK # key:
THANK-YOU
1 2 3 CHECK# CALL AGAIN

or, if you entered a table number, enter the 07/20/2015 MON 10:15
table number and press the TABLE key:
3 TABLE CHECK # #123
PBAL $17.00
2. Register the next items you wish to sell. TABLE #3
3. To total the posting, press SERVICE: GARLIC BREAD $2.00
SERVICE $2.00
SERVICE BFWD $19.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

70 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Paying a Hard Check
1. Enter the number of the guest check, press Sample of Hard Check postings printed on an
the CHECK # key: optional printer:

1 2 3 CHECK# DATE 07/20/2015 MON


CHECK # #123
or, if you entered a table number, enter the PBAL $0.00
table number and press the TABLE key: CHICKEN $7.00
3 TABLE STEAK $10.00
SERVICE $17.00
2. If necessary, add additional items. If you BFWD $17.00
wish to add a tip, press SUBTOTAL, then No.000011 CLERK 01 TIME 09:15
enter the tip amount and press the TIP
key: DATE 07/20/2015 MON
PBAL $17.00
SUB
TOTAL GARLIC BREAD $2.00
SERVICE $2.00

3 0 0 TIP
BFWD $19.00
No.000012 CLERK 01 TIME 10:15

3. Pay the balance as you would normally


DATE 07/20/2015 MON
tender a transaction, with CASH,
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE PBAL $19.00
functions. If the tender is greater than the TIP $3.00
balance due, change is displayed. CHECKS PAID $22.00
TOTAL $22.00
2 5 0 0 CASH CASH $25.00
CHANGE $3.00
No.000013 LERK 01 TIME 11:15

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 71


Fast Food Drive Thru
For fast food drive thru windows, the NR-500 Series has the capability of storing orders when they
are taken, and then recalling the next order automatically at the payment window. (Note: Drive thru
storing & recalling must be done at the same register.)
• The PBAL function becomes a recall function when the drive thru feature is enabled in the
CHECK # function key program. Press the PBAL key to recall the lowest tracking number
balance.
• Orders are stored by first pressing the CHECK # key to automatically assign the next
tracking number, then pressing SERVICE. (A macro sequence key could be created to
execute both functions sequentially by pressing the MACRO key.)
See “Function Key Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.

Taking a Drive Thru Order


1. Register the items you wish to sell. Receipt Example:
2. Press the CHECK # key to begin an
THANK-YOU
automatically assigned check:
CALL AGAIN
CHECK#
07/20/2015 MON 08:33
3. To store the posting, press SERVICE:
HAMBURGER $2.00
SERVICE FRIES $1.00
CHECK # #3
PBAL $0.00
SERVICE $3.00
BFWD $3.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

Paying a Drive Thru Order


1. Press the PBAL key: Receipt Example:

PBAL THANK-YOU
CALL AGAIN
2. If necessary, add additional items, register
discounts or coupons. 07/20/2015 MON 08:33
3. Pay the balance as you would normally
tender a transaction, with CASH, CHECK # #3
PBAL $3.00
CHECK, or one of the CHARGE
CHECKS PAID $3.00
functions. If the tender is greater than the
balance due, change is displayed. TOTAL $3.00
CASH $5.00
5 0 0 CASH CHANGE $2.00
CLERK 01 000011 00001

72 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Clerk Interrupt Operation
Clerk interrupt allows you to temporarily suspend a transaction in progress by allowing a new clerk to
sign on and register a new transaction. After the new transaction is complete, the original clerk can
sign on, the suspended transaction is recalled and may be completed.
You must use the code entry method for clerk sign on; Program the ‘Password’ for each employee.
See “Employee Programming” in the “Program Mode Programming” chapter.
Set the options: ‘Clerk Entry’ as ‘CODE’ and ‘Clerk Interrupt’ as ‘Y’. See “SYSTEM Options” of
“Options Programming” " in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter.
NOTE: Using the clerk interrupt feature requires allocation of at least one guest check for each clerk
and sufficient soft check lines to support the interrupted transaction (i.e. if 20 soft check lines are
allocated, a transaction with up to 20 lines can be interrupted.)

To Use Clerk Interrupt System


1. Enter the number of the Clerk and
THANK-YOU
press the CLERK# key, or press
CALL AGAIN
the CLERK1,2,3 keys.

1 CLERK# 07/20/2015 MON 08:33

2. Register the items you wish to sell. PLU1 $1.00


3. To total the posting and save for ** CLERK INTERRUPT **
further items. CASH $1.00
4. Enter the number of the next Clerk CLERK 01 000011 00001
and press the CLERK#, or press
the CLERK1,2,3 keys.

2 CLERK#

5. Repeat as above until all items have


been sold
6. To accept payment press CASH,
CHECK or and other payment
function

CASH

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Operations • 73


Not Found PLU
Note: The “SYSTEM Options” of “Options Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming"
chapter. The option “ENABLE NOT FOUND PLU” must be set to YES to allow this function.
The “Not Found PLU” feature is available for use when an optional scanner is used to input PLU’s.
If an item is scanned that is not programmed in the PLU file, the operator has the option to input the
price of the item and assign it the same descriptor and properties of another PLU. This provides a
simple mechanism for quickly building an item file for a simple scanning installation.
1. Scan an item or input a PLU number. If the item is in the PLU file, it will register, if an item
is not in the PLU file, the NOT FOUND PLU screen will display:
NOT FOUND PLU
STOP:0 SAVE:1
2. Press the numeric “1” key to allow the registration of the PLU. The screen will display
PRICE field.
NOT FOUND PLU

ENTER PRICE+CASH
0.00
3. Enter the PLU PRICE and press the CASH key. The screen will be display:
4. Not Found PLU
NOT FOUND PLU
SELECT COPY PLU
0
5. Press a PLU on the keyboard or enter a PLU number and press the PLU key. The PLU will
register using the descriptor and tax status of the copied PLU.
Note: The not found PLU will assume the same attributes of the PLU selected here. For example, if
the item scanned is a “liquor” item, then press another PLU in the liquor category, or if you are using
a PLU designated to accept open liquor entries, that PLU must be set to be a preset PLU with a preset
value of zero and preset override allowed.
(If you copy an open price PLU, the not found PLU will also be an open price PLU.)

Not Found PLU List


Managers will typically use the “Not Found PLU list” as a tool to update the PLU file. A list of up to
50 not found PLU items can be retained in the list. When capacity is reached, you must RESET NOT
FOUND PLU LIST.
• To print the NOT FOUND PLU list, choose X REPORTS → PLU → NOT FOUND PLU
(selection #3) from the PLU REPORT menu.
• To print and clear (reset) the NOT FOUND PLU list, choose RESET NOT FOUND PLU
(selection #3) from the Z-MODE menu.

74 • Operations SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Manager Mode (X Mode)

Introduction
All Management Functions take place with the control lock in the X or Z position. In this way, only
those with the correct key will have access to these operations. Some register operations may be
programmed to require the MANAGER MODE in order to operate. All reports require a key that
will access the MANAGE MODE (X REPORT) or CLOSING MODE (Z REPORT) position.

Overview
The following procedures can be performed from the Manager Mode (X mode) menu:
♦ Manager Mode / Report Mode
♦ X Reports
♦ Declaration
♦ Flash Report
♦ Declaration
♦ Set Training Mode
♦ Program Stock Entry
♦ Save Report to SD Card
♦ Receipt On or Off

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Manager Mode (X Mode) • 75


Manager Mode/Report Mode
Manager mode allowed only with manager control can be performed.
1. Move to the “X” key lock position to display the MANAGER MODE screen:
R:ON CLE R K 0 1 K1 P 1

MANAGER MODE

2. Press CASH to display the REPORT MODE.


X M OD E
1 . X R E POR T S 
2 . D EC L ARA T I ON
3 . F LA S H R E P OR T
4 . S ET TRA I N M O DE
5 . S TO C K E N T RY
6 . S AV E RP T SD
- P A GE 1/2 -

X M OD E
7 . R CT ON/ O F F 

- P A GE 2/2 -

76 • Manager Mode (X Mode) SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


X Reports
X reports read sales totals and counters within a report without resetting.
1. Move to the “X” key lock position to display the MANAGER MODE screen:
R:ON CLE R K 0 1 K1 P 1

MANAGER MODE

2. Press CASH to display the X MODE menu.


3. From the X MODE menu press 1 and CASH to view the X Reports menu:
X R EP O RTS
1 . F IN A NCI A L 
2 . T IM E
3 . P LU
4 . C LE R K
5 . G RO U P
6 . M IX & M A T CH
- P A GE 1/2 -

4. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select a report from the menu, press the CASH key to
confirm. You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
X R EP O RTS
7 . S TO C K 
8 . O PE N TA B L E
9.EJ

- P A GE 2/2 -

5. When a report is selected, the options with the report class are displayed. In some cases,
further options are displayed. the FINANCIAL screen displays.
6. Use the ↑ key and the↓ key to scroll up and down through the options displayed; Press the
CASH key to select the option.
7. Select the REPORT LEVEL (DAILY or PERIOD) then press CASH, the report will start.
F I N AN C IAL
1 . D AI L Y(X 1 ) 
2 . P ER I OD( X 2 )

- P A GE 1/1 -

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Manager Mode (X Mode) • 77


X Report Table of Available Reports

Report Number/ Report Daily/ Range


Report Type Selections Period
1. FINANCIAL 1.DAILY(X1)
1.FINANCIAL
2.PERIOD(X2)
2.DRAWER TOTALS 1.DAILY(X1)
3.DAY 2.PERIOD(X2)
1.DAILY(X1)
4.VOID
2.PERIOD(X2)
1.DAILY(X1)
5.TRAIN FINANCIAL
2.PERIOD(X2)
2. TIME 1.DAILY(X1)
2.PERIOD(X2)
3. PLU 1.DAILY(X1)
1.PLU SALE
2.PERIOD(X2)
1.ALL
2.PLU BY Group
2.SELECT BY GROUP
1.SALES
3.NOT FOUND PLU
2.PROGRAM
1.DAILY(X1)
4.BEST PLU SALE
2.PERIOD(X2)
1.DAILY(X1)
5.BEST PLU QTY
2.PERIOD(X2)
1.DAILY(X1)
6.WORST PLU SALE
2.PERIOD(X2)
1.DAILY(X1)
7.WORST PLU QTY
2.PERIOD(X2)
1.By PLU No.
8.LAST SOLD 2.By group
3.By date
4. CLERK 1.DAILY(X1) 1.ALL
2.RANGE
2.PERIOD(X2) 1.ALL
2.RANGE
5. GROUP 1.DAILY(X1)
2.PERIOD(X2)
6. MIX & MATCH 1.DAILY(X1)
2.PERIOD(X2)
7. STOCK 1.DAILY(X1) 1.All
1.STOCK
2.Range
1.ALL
2.STOCK BY GRP
2.SELECT BY GRP
1.ALL
3.MINIMUM STOCK
2.SELECT BY GRP
8. EJ (See Next page)

78 • Manager Mode (X Mode) SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Electronic Journal Operation
An electronic journal feature is available on the NR-500 Series. The electronic journal captures the
sales journal in the register memory. If you intend to use the electronic journal, you must allocate
sufficient memory (see “ALLOCATION” in the "Service Mode Programming" chapter) and activate
the journal and set related journal capture options (see “EJ” of “Options Programming” in the
“Program Mode Programming” chapter.)
Use this program to print all or selected parts of the journal memory. Note: this program will not
clear the electronic journal. See “RESET E.J” in the “Z-MODE”.
1. Move to the “X” key lock position; Press CASH to display the X MODE menu screen. Press
1 and CASH to access the X REPORTS.
2. From the X REPORTS menu, press 9 and CASH to display the electronic journal menu:
EJ
1 . A LL 
2 . C AS H
3 . C HE C K
4 . C HA R GE
5 . P ER C ENT
6 . R A/ P O
- P A GE 1/3 -

3. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
EJ
7 . R ET U RN 
8 . E RR COR R . /V O ID
9 . N OS A LE
1 0 . CA N CEL
1 1 . NE G ATI V E
1 2 . RE S ET R E PO R T
- P A GE - 2/ 3

EJ
1 3 . VO I D M O D E 
1 4 . TR A INI N G
1 5 . BY CLE R K
1 6 . BY DAT E
1 7 . BY RCP T NO .
1 8 . BY LIN E
- P A GE - 3/ 3

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Manager Mode (X Mode) • 79


Declaration
Cash declaration is the process of counting and reporting media in drawer before a report is taken.
"Enforce cash declaration" is an option that requires to the operator to declare amounts of media in
the drawer before a financial, clerk, or cash in drawer report can be generated. The purpose of this
feature is to insure accurate reporting, even in case of an overage. You can enforce declaration by
setting the appropriate options program. See “REPORT” of “Options Programming” in the "Program
Mode Programming" chapter.
1. Move to the “X” key lock position; Press CASH to display the X MODE menu screen.
2. From the X MODE menu press 2 and CASH to display the DELCARATION screen. The
cash drawer opens.
D E C LA R ATI O N

C A SH 0 . 00
C H EC K 0 . 00
C H AR G E # 0 . 00
T O TA L 0 . 00

3. At the DECLARATION screen, enter the amounts for CASH, CHECK’s, and CAGRGE’s:
• Enter cash amounts, press the CASH key. You can make as many entries as you
wish, the screen will keep running totals. You may wish to use the X/TIME key to
multiply. For example, if you are declaring 37 quarters, you can enter 37, press
X/TIME, enter 25, and then press CASH. The result is added to the cash declared
running total on the screen.
• Enter checks individually, or enter a check total, press the CHECK key.
• Enter charges in the drawer, press the appropriate CHARGE key.
4. When you have completed declaration entries, press the CASH key again to finalize and total
your declaration.

80 • Manager Mode (X Mode) SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Training Mode
A training mode is available so that the register can be operated (to practice registrations) without
updating totals and counters. If you choose to use training mode, you must set a training mode
password (see “TRAIN MODE” of the “Options Programming” in the "Program Mode
Programming" chapter.)
• The receipt and journal print the message "TRAINING MODE START" when training mode
is activated.
• The receipt and journal print the message "TRAINING MODE END" when training mode is
exited.
• The message ** TRAINING MODE ** prints on each receipt printed while training mode is
active.
• The journal does not print during training mode.
• The total and counter on the financial report labeled "TRAIN TTL" is updated with the net
amount of each training transaction.
Note: If you make registrations to check tracking numbers in training mode, remember that
the check tracking total will be updated. Remember to pay or clear the check file (CLOSING
MODE menu/Z REPORT/TABLE) before resuming normal operations. You must close all
open checks prior to entering training mode.

1. Move to the “X” key lock position; Press CASH to display the X MODE menu.
2. From the X MODE menu press 4 and CASH to enter or exit training mode. The SET
TRAIN MODE screen displays:
S E T T R AIN M OD E

S T A RT : 1 / E ND : 0

3. Enter 1 to start training mode, (if you have selected a training password, type your password
when prompted) or enter 0 and press CASH to end training mode. A chit will print
indicating you are starting or ending training mode.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Manager Mode (X Mode) • 81


Stock Entry
If you designate a PLU as an inventory item (see PLU programming) then a special PLU stock
counter keeps a running inventory count. This program is where you can set the current stock level or
print a scan of current stock quantities. You can choose to Add, Subtract, or Replace the current stock
level.
Inventory is kept in decimal units two digits beyond the decimal. you must enter stock adjustments to
two digits beyond the decimal. For example, for ten units of inventory type 1 0 0 0 (without pressing
the decimal).

1. Turn the control lock to the X position; Press S T O CK ENT R Y


CASH to display the X MODE. 1 . P RO G RAM 
2. From the X MODE menu, press 5 and 2 . S CA N
CASH; the STOCK ENTRY screen is
displayed:

ONE PLU
3. To program stock on a single PLU, on the P R O GR A M
Sock Entry screen, press 1 and then press the 1 . O NE 
CASH key. The PROGRAM screen is
displayed: 2 . R AN G E

4. From the PROGRAM screen, press 1 and S T O CK ENT R Y


CASH to add stock to ONE (individual) F R O M P LU #
PLU. The Stock Entry FROM PLU # screen
0
displays.
5. Enter the number for the PLU you wish to
add stock to, then press CASH.
6. Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the operation S T O CK ENT R Y
you want to perform: ADD (+), SUB (-) or O P E RA T OR : AD D (+)
REPLACE. When you have the appropriate
selection, Press CASH. AD D ( +) 

7. On the ENTER CNT screen, enter the stock S T O CK ENT R Y


quantity you wish to ADD/SUB/REPLACE, P L U 25
then press CASH. For example: ten units
C U RR E NT 0.0 0
would be entered as 1 0 0 0 (without pressing
the decimal). M I NI M UM 0.0 0
E N T ER CNT 0.0 0
8. You are returned to the Stock Entry screen. S T O CK ENT R Y
9. Continue entering stock quantities for E N T ER PLU #
individual PLUs or press CLEAR to exit the 0
screen.

82 • Manager Mode (X Mode) SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


RANGE PLU
10. To enter stock values for a RANGE of PLUs, S T O CK ENT R Y
From the PROGRAM screen, (See step 3 F R O M P LU #
above) press 2 and CASH to display RANGE
0
PLU screen.
11. Enter FROM PLU# number to display TO ST O CK E N TR Y
PLU# screen. Press CASH after each entry.
E N T ER FRO M PL U #
1
E N T ER TO P L U#
20
12. Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select operation you ST O CK E N TR Y
want to perform: ADD, SUB or REPLACE O P E RA T OR : AD D (+)
stock; Press CASH.
AD D ( +) 
13. When the ENTER CNT displays, enter the S T O CK ENT R Y
stock quantity you wish to O P E RA T OR : AD D (+)
ADD/SUBTRACT/REPLACE, and press
AD D ( +)
CASH. For example: ten units would be
entered as 1 0 0 0 (without pressing the E N T ER CNT 0. 0 0
decimal).
14. You are returned to the Stock Entry screen. S T O CK ENT R Y
15. Continue entering stock quantities for PLUs F R O M P LU #
or press CLEAR to exit the screen. 0

SCAN STOCK
Current PLU stock values for all inventory PLUs can be printed from the PLU Stock Scan.
1. Turn the control lock to the X position; Press CASH to display the X MODE.
2. From the X MODE menu, press 5 and CASH; the STOCK ENTRY screen is displayed:
S T O CK ENT R Y
1 . P RO G RAM
2 . S CA N
3. Press 2 and CASH to print the STOCK SCAN.

Sample PLU STOCK SCAN


--------------------------------
****** PLU STOCK SCAN ******
--------------------------------
PLU1
MINIMUM CNT 0
STCK CNT 25
PLU2
MINIMUM CNT 0
STCK CNT 25

CLERK 01 000006 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Manager Mode (X Mode) • 83


Open Table
This operation allows access to the check file (if used) that is located in the register. Use this report to
print out any open checks stored in the register.
1. Turn the control lock to the X position; Press S T O CK ENT R Y
CASH to display the X MODE. 1 . D AI L Y(Z 1 ) 
2. From the X MODE menu, press 8 and
CASH; the OPEN TABLE screen is
displayed:

- P AG E 1/ 1 -
3. Press 1 and CASH to initiate (print) the 10/31/2018 WED 11:29
report.
X1 REPORT 00002
------------------------
OPEN TABLE

CHECK : 11 $14.41
CLERK 01

CLERK 01 000026 00000

Save Report
You can save the Daily (X1) Report files as CSV format or REP format. Please refer to ‘Saving
Reports’ in the ‘Program Backup and Restore’ of Service Mode Programming.

Receipt On / Off
You can set the register receipt printer to an on or off condition. When turned OFF, transactions will
not be printed, but reports will continue to print, if requested.
1. Press CASH to display the X MODE.
2. From the X MODE menu, press 7 and CASH for stock entry.
R CPT O N/ O FF

ON:0 / OFF:1
3. The RCPT ON/OFF screen displays. Press the 0 to print or the 1 to not print.
Note: When the receipt is off, a receipt may be printed after the sale by pressing CASH after
the transaction is complete.

84 • Manager Mode (X Mode) SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Z-Mode

Overview
All Management Functions take place with the control lock in the X or Z position. In this way, only
those with the correct key will have access to these functions.
The following procedures are done from the Z-Mode menu:
• Z Reports
• Reset Electronic Journal
• Reset Not Found PLU List
• Connect Server
• Datatran Function
• Datatran Transaction

Accessing Z-Mode Functions

1. Move the key lock to the Z position to display the Z-MODE menu:
Z - M OD E
1 . Z R E POR T S 
2 . R ES E T E . J .
3 . N OT FOU N D P L U
4 . C ON N ECT S ER V ER
5 . D AT A TRA N FU N CTI O N
6 . D AT A RTR A N T R ANS A C TI O N
- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Z-Mode • 85


Z Reports
Z reports reset sales totals and counters within the selected report.
1. From the Z-MODE menu press 1 and CASH to select Z Reports:
Z R EP O RTS
1 . F IN A NCI A L 
2 . T IM E
3 . P LU
4 . C LE R K
5 . G RO U P
6 . M IX & M A T CH
- P A GE 1/2 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑key and page↓ key.
Z R EP O RTS
7 . S TO C K 
8 . O PE N TA B L E

- P A GE 2/2 -

3. When a report is selected, the FINANCIAL screen displays.


F I N AN C IAL
1 . F IN A NCI A L 
2 . D AY
3 . V OI D
4 . T RA I N F I N AN C IAL

- P A GE 1/1 -

4. Select the REPORT LEVEL (DAILY or PERIOD). After the selection, the report will start.
F I N AN C IAL
1 . D AI L Y(Z 1 ) 
2 . P ER I OD( Z 2 )

- P A GE 1/1 -

86 • Z-Mode SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Reset Electronic Journal
An electronic journal feature is available on the NR-500 Series. The electronic journal captures the
sales journal in the register memory. If you intend to use the electronic journal, you must allocate
sufficient memory (see "ALLOCATION" " in the "Service Mode Programming” chapter) and activate
the journal and set related journal capture options (see "EJ" of “Options Programming” in the
"Program Mode Programming" chapter.)
Use this to clear the journal memory. The journal will not be printed. To read all or selected parts of
the E.J., see “Electronic Journal Operation” in the "Manager Mode (X Mode)" chapter.
1. From the Z-MODE menu press 2 and CASH to clear the electronic journal:
RE S E T E .J

ARE YOU SURE?


Y=CASH N=CLEAR

2. The screen asks: ARE YOU SURE? Press the CASH key for YES or CLEAR key for NO
to clear the report.

Reset Not Found PLU


If a PLU number is input, or scanned, that is not programmed in the PLU file, the operator has the
option to input the price of the item and assign it the same descriptor and properties of another PLU.
Up to 50 “Not Found” entries can be recorded, when capacity is reached, the memory must be
cleared. Use this operation to clear the Not found PLU’s.
1. From the Z-MODE menu press 3 and CASH to clear the Not Found PLU’s you added.
N OT F O UN D PL U

ARE YOU SURE?


Y=CASH N=CLEAR

2. The screen asks: ARE YOU SURE? Press the CASH key for YES or CLEAR key for NO
to clear the report.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Z-Mode • 87


Available Z Reports

Report Number/Type Report Selections Daily/Period


1. FINANCIAL 1. FINANCIAL 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
2. DAY 2. PERIOD (Z2)
3. VOID 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
4. TRAIN FINANCIAL 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
2. TIME 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
3. PLU 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
4. CLERK 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
5. GROUP 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
6. MIX & MATCH 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
7. STOCK 1. DAILY (Z1)
2. PERIOD (Z2)
8. OPEN TABLE 1. DAILY (Z1)

Note: Running the Open Table report in the Z position will clear the check tracking file.

88 • Z-Mode SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Open Table
This operation allows access to the check file (if used) that is located in the register. Use this report to
print out any open checks stored in the register and clear the tracking file.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position; Press O PEN T AB L E
1 and CASH to display the Z REPORTS. 1 . D AI L Y(Z 1 ) 
2. Press 8 and CASH; the select the OPEN
TABLE REPORT. The screen is displayed:

- P AG E 1/ 1 -
3. Press 1 and CASH to initiate (print) the 10/31/2018 WED 11:29
report. After printing the check file is cleared.
Z1 REPORT 00002
------------------------
OPEN TABLE

CHECK : 11 $14.41
CLERK 01

CLERK 01 000026 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Z-Mode • 89


Service Mode Programming

Introduction
Use the Service Mode (S-Mode) to perform secure operations. The S position is one position clock-
wise from the PGM position. The S position is not labeled. The key marked with a “C” allows access
to this position.
The NR-500 series provides back-up functions of all reports and PGMs, port device settings, and key
assignment. Moreover, you could initialize the memory to factory default and reallocate memory.

Overview
The following procedures are performed from the Service Mode menu:
• Self Tests
• Memory clear
• Allocation
• Assignment of functions to keyboard locations
• Define port
• ECR Setup
• Program backup
• Help menu

90 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Accessing Service Mode Functions
1. Move to the SERVICE MODE to display the SERVICE MODE menu:
SER V I CE MOD E
1 . S EL F TE S T 
2 . M EM O RY C L EA R
3 . A LL O CAT I O N
4 . K EY ASS I G N
5 . D EF I NE P O RT
6 . E CR SET U P
- P A GE 1/2 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can also
select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
S ERV I C E M ODE
7 . P RO G RAM B AC K UP 
8 . H EL P ME N U

- P A GE 2/2 -

Self Test
Various components of the NR-500 Series are tested by using this program.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 1 and CASH to display the SELF TEST menu:
S E L F T EST
1 . B AT C H T E S T
2 . P RI N TER
3 . D IS P LAY
4 . K EY B OAR D
5 . I NT E RFA C E
6 . R TC
- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm.
3. Press the digit representing the test you wish to perform.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 91


Self-Test Operations
Operation Selection Description
1. Batch Test Runs a series of hardware tests; Some tests require
additional equipment or inputs from operator.
2. Printer 1. Print Test Prints the printer test pattern.
2. Reverse Image Prints a test receipt image in reverse.
3. Endless Print Prints a test transaction continuously, press clear to exit
the test.
4. Barcode Test Prints a Test Barcode.
5. Make Barcode Print a barcode for numeric entry up to 13 digits.
3. Display 1. LCD Test Runs the LCD Tests.
2. Contrast Test Performs the Contrast Test.
4. Keyboard 1. Keyboard Test Allows keyboard test – press desired keys to test.
2. Mode Key Test Mode test – tune mode key to VOID and back to S-
Mode.
5. Interface 1. Port 1
Port tests require a Loop-Back connector be attached to
2. Port 2
the port for testing.
3. Port 3
4. Drawer Press CASH to Kick the drawer, close the drawer to
repeat test; press CLEAR to exit the test.
5. USB Host Insert USB drive to run test.
6. External SD Insert SD Card to run test.
7. Micro SD Insert Micro SD to run test.
8. Ethernet Requires Ethernet connection to run test.
6. RTC 1. RTC Set Set Date & Time
2. RTC View View the Date & Time

92 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Memory Clear
Before you use your NR-500 Series for the first time, you must perform a memory all clear to ensure
that all totals and counters are cleared and that the default program is installed. Go to “Clearing
Memory” on page “25” to complete this procedure.
From the Service Mode menu, you can clear selected areas of memory without clearing memory
entirely.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 2 and CASH to display the MEMORY CLEAR screen:
2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can also
select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
M E M OR Y CL E A R
1 . C LE A R T O T AL 
2 . C LE A R G R A ND
3 . C LE A R P L U
4 . C LE A R P R I CE = 0
5 . E DI T CO U N TE R S
6 . N ON MOV E R C L R

3. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can also
select menu by page↑key and page↓ key.
4. To clear total, press 1 the CASH. The screen asks: ARE YOU SURE?

ARE YOU SURE?


Y=CASH N=CLEAR
5. Press the CASH for YES or the CLEAR for NO.
6. The message "ALL TOTAL CLEAR" is printed and the screen returns to the SERVICE MODE
menu.

Clear Totals
This selection clears all totals and counters, including the grand total.

Clear Grand Total


This selection clears only the grand total.

Clear PLU File


This selection clears the entire PLU file, including totals, counters and programming.

Clear Price=0
This selection clears the entire PLU’s programmed zero price.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 93


Edit Counters
This selection edits some counters and totals:
Press CASH to edit the Z counter,
Press CASH to edit the Receipt No,
Press CASH to edit the Grand Total and
Press CASH to edit the Train Grand Total.
Press CASH again to exit.
E D I T C OUN T E RS
Z C OU N TER 1
R E C EI P T # 13

G R A ND TOT A L
100 . 0 0
T R A IN GRA N D T T L
0.00

Clear Non Mover


This selection clears the entire PLU file for items that have not sold, including totals, counters and
programming.

94 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Memory Allocation
Note: You must step through every memory allocation field to implement new memory
allocation. If you press CLEAR, at any field you will abort memory allocation processes
without making changes. Changes to Memory Allocation will clear all program data.
1. From SERVICE MODE menu press 3 and CASH to display the MEMORY CLEAR screen:
2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can also
select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
A L L OC A TIO N
PLU #
( 6 0 -8 0 00)
1000

B Y T ES REM A I NI N G 6 4 7 47 BYT E S

3. Starting at the PLU’s field, enter the quantity of each memory field. Press the CASH key after
each entry, and the screen will move to the next field.
A L L OC A TIO N

ARE YOU SURE?


Y=CASH N=CLEAR

4. Continue filling each field until completion. Press CASH after setting the last field, "CHECK
TYPE". The screen will display "ARE YOU SURE ?". Press the CASH for YES or the
CLEAR for No.
5. The message will print either: "MEMORY ALLOCATION OK" or "MEMORY
ALLOCATION SIZE OVER" if you attempt to allocate features requiring more memory than is
available.

DEFAULT Memory Allocation Specifications


ALLOCATION ITEM DEFAULT MAXIMUM
PLU 1000 3200
CLERK 10 99
GROUP 10 99
PRICE LEVEL 1 2
MIX AND MATCH 20 100
EJ LINE 1000 15000
CHECK# 10 500
SOFT CHECK LINES 50 100
CHECK TYPE 0 SOFT(0) / HARD(1)

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 95


Function Key Assignment
Any programmable key location may be reprogrammed with a function from the list of available
functions on page 97 of this manual. The default program installs the functions as they are shown
with the standard key legends.
To change the function key assigned on a specific key:
1. At the SERVICE MODE, press 4 and CASH for Key Assignment programming. The KEY
ASSIGNMENT screen displays:
K E Y A S SIG N
000
[ H E LP ]
■ EN T ER F U NC T ION K EY COD E
■ PR E SS F U NC T ION K EY TO S A VE
■ RE P EAT O R [ CAS H ] T O EN D
■ [S U BT] : C OD E S [ CA S H]: E N D

2. Enter a new key code from “Function key codes” on page “97” and press key location.
You can Press the SUBTOTAL key to print the key code table.
3. Press CASH to save the changes you have made and to return to SERVICE MODE.
4. The printer will print out a receipt showing all the changes made to the keyboard.

Notes:
 Numeric keys (0-9), CLEAR, and CASH cannot be removed from the keyboard unless they
have been assigned to a new keyboard location. This protects the programmer from
accidentally removing keys that are required for register programming and operations.
 CHARGE↑ and CHECK↓ keys are used for navigation throughout the X – Z – P and S-
Mode operations. These key locations revert to their navigation operations, ↑ and ↓ when
used in the X – Z – P and S-Modes.
 If you wish to program the CASH key, select it immediately after selecting KEY
ASSIGNMENT from the SERVICE MODE menu. After the initial key is programmed, the
CASH key is used to finalize the program.

96 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Function Key Codes

Code Function 344 PLU # 392 AUTO CASH 6

001~300 NLU 1~NLU 300 345 PRICE LEVEL 1 393 AUTO CASH 7

301~309 Numeric 1~9 346 PRICE LEVEL 2 394 AUTO CASH 8

310 ZERO MACRO1 ~ 395 AUTO CASH 9


347~356
MACRO10
311 DOUBLE ZERO 396 CLERK 1
357 MDSE RETURN
312 DECIMAL 397 CLERK 2
358 MODIFIER 1
313 #/NS 398 CLERK 3
359 MODIFIER 2
314 %1 399 CLERK 4
360 MODIFIER 3
315 %2 400 CLERK 5
361 MODIFIER 4
316 %3 401 CLERK 6
362 MODIFIER 5
317 %4 402 CLERK 7
364 PO 1
318 %5 403 CLERK 8
365 PO 2
X/TIME 404 CLERK 9
319 366 PO 3
(Print Screen)
405 CLERK 10
320 ADD CHECK 367 PAPER FEED
406 CHARGE #
321 CANCEL 368 PROMO
407 HELP
322 CASH 369 RA 1
408 MACRO #
323 CHARGE 1 370 RA 2
409 PRICE CHANGE
324 CHARGE 2 371 RA 3
410 STOCK INQUIRY
325 CHARGE 3 372 SUBTOTAL
411 KEY SHIFT 1
326 CHARGE 4 373 SCALE
412 KEY SHIFT 2
327 CHARGE 5 374 TARE
413 KEY SHIFT 3
328 CHARGE 6 375 TAX EXEMPT
414~415 RESERVED
329 CHARGE 7 376 TAX SHIFT 1
416 EMV TIP
330 CHARGE 8 377 TAX SHIFT 2
417~443 RESERVED
331 CHECK 378 TAX SHIFT 3
444 EAT IN
332 CHECK CASH 379 TAX SHIFT 4
445 TAKE OUT
333 ENDORSEMENT 380 VOID ITEM
446 DRIVE THRU
334 CLEAR 381 WASTE
447 CHECK #
335 CLERK# 382 VALIDATION
448 GUEST #
336 CONV. 1 383 PRICE INQUIRY
449 PBAL
337 CONV. 2 384 RECEIPT ON/OFF
450 PRINTCHECK
338 CONV. 3 386 ALPHA TEXT
451 SERVICE
339 CONV. 4 387 AUTO CASH 1
452 TABLE #
340 ERR CORRECT 388 AUTO CASH 2
453 TIP
341 F/S SHIFT 389 AUTO CASH 3
454 CHECK SPLIT
342 F/S SUBTOTAL 390 AUTO CASH 4
455~457 Reserved
343 F/S TEND 391 AUTO CASH 5
458 INACTIVE

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 97


Define Port
Connection to optional POS devices is provided with one DB9 and two RJ45 standard RS-232C serial
ports and one USB port. The port option settings here assign the device and communication protocol
for each port.

Serial Port Setting


1. At the SERVICE MODE, press 5 and CASH for RS232C programming. The port selection
screen displays:
D E F IN E PO R T
1 . P OR T 1
2 . P OR T 2
3 . P OR T 3
4 . U SB TYP E
5 . S CA N

- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Enter the digit (1-5) corresponding to the port you wish to program. Press the 5 and CASH
to print the settings for ports 1-3. The appropriate PORT PROGRAM screen displays:
3. Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key for selecting value. Press CASH to confirm the option value
and return menu. You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
PORT 1
1 . B AU D RA T E [9 6 0 0]
2 . P AR I TY [N O N E]
3 . D AT A BI T S [8B I T S]
4 . S TO P BI T S [1 B I T]
5 . D EV I CE [N O N E]
6 . P RI N TER [N O N E]

PORT 1
7 . D IS P LAY [EP S O N]
8 . S CA L E [ N C I]
9 . K P S TAR T LI N E [ 0]
1 0 . KP END L IN E [ 7]
1 1 . SL I P S T A RT LIN E [ 0]

4. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the DEFINE PORT screen.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 98


RS232C Settings Screen Program Notes
Option Description
BAUD RATE Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38,400, 57,600,
or 115,200 from the screen. (9600 is default.)
PARITY Select NONE, EVEN or ODD. (NONE is default.)
DATA BITS Select 8 or 7 from the screen. (8 is default.)
STOP BITS Select 1 or 2 from the screen. (1 is default.)
DEVICE FUNCTION Select NONE, PC, PRINTER, *SCANNER, POLE,
SCALE, EFT, DATATRAN or REMOTE JOURNAL
from the screen. (NONE is default.)
PRINTER TYPE Select the printer type connected to this port.
DISPLAY Select the pole display type connected to this port.
SCALE Select the scale type connected to this port.
KP START LINE (0-20) Enter the number of KP START LINE.
KP END LINE (0-20) Enter the number of KP END LINE.
SLIP START LINE (0-20) Enter the number of SLIP START LINE.
*The register will work with lower power USB scanners, but not the Metrologic/Honeywell. The
Metrologic/Honeywell scanners can be used with the serial connection, they will require the DB9 to
RJ45 adaptor and the power supply.

USB Setting
1. At the SERVICE MODE, press 5 and CASH for DEFINE PORT.
2. From the DEFINE PORT screen, press 3 and CASH for USB TYPE.
3. Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select USB type and press the CASH key to confirm.
U S B T Y PE
DEVICE: MEMORY
MEMORY

Note: If you select other types, Your NR-500 series will be rebooted by itself.

USB Specifications
USB TYPE USB VERSION SPEED
PC-COM For connecting PC - -
USB 2.0 FULL SPEED
SCANNER For using USB scanner
(only HID type) only
MEMORY For backup & restore USB 2.0 FULL SPEED

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 99


ECR Setup
1. From SERVICE MODE, press 6 and CASH for ECR SETUP screen displays:
E C R S E TUP
1 . R OM INF O
2 . P RI N T D E N SI T Y
3 . L CD CON T R AS T
4 . S ET NET W O RK

2. Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key for selecting value. Press CASH to confirm the option value
and return menu.

ROM INFO
This selection displays the version information, check sum and date of the Flash ROM. You may be
asked to check your Flash ROM version if you contact your dealer for assistance.
1. From ECR SETUP menu, press 1 and CASH key for ROM INFO.
2. The version information is printed, press CLEAR key to returns to the SERVICE MODE
menu.

Print Density
1. From ECR SETUP menu, press 2 and CASH to program ‘PRINT DENSITY’ screen:
P R I NT DEN S I TY
( D E NS I TY L E VE L :1- 3 ) 2

2. Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key for selecting value. Press CASH to confirm the density level
and return to the ECR SETUP menu.

LCD Contrast for 16-Character LCD


1. From ECR SETUP menu, press 3 and CASH to program ‘LCD CONSTRAST’ screen:
2. Press 1 and CASH key for Customer Rear Display (Two Line).
3. During check Customer Rear Display press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to change contrast. Press
CASH to confirm and return to the ECR SETUP menu.

LCD Contrast for Graphic LCD


1. From ECR SETUP menu, press 3 and CASH to program ‘LCD CONSTRAST’ screen:
2. Press 2 and CASH key for Operator Display (Multi Line).
3. During check Operator Display press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to change contrast. Press
CASH to confirm and return to the ECR SETUP menu.

Set Network
Use DHCP, ECR IP, ECR SUBNET, ECR GATEWAY, Server IP, Server PORT, ETHERNET USE.

100 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Read Carefully: Store Name Notes
The store name you set on “Store name” in the “SYSTEM Options” is used to identify program and
report data on the SD card. Note that the default store name is “STORE001”. When changing the
Store Name, always use an 8-character store name.
If you are using the SD Card to move information to a PC or use the program or report data with the
PC Utility, you must pay close attention to the store name. Do not use characters such as “-” or “/”
that cannot be used in naming a folder on your PC. If you use such a character in your store name,
you will not be able to read the files on your PC.
The Store Name field is 8-characters in length.

Note: If you are Using an SD Card for the First Time . . .


NOTE: SD cards must be formatted as FAT 32
NOTE: The SD card supports more than 1GB.
CAUTION: Formatting the SD card will clear all data on the SD card and prepare it for use.
1. Start Windows Explorer.
2. Select the SD card drive, right click and select Format. (Win XP screen shown; slightly
different procedures are used with different operating systems.)
3. From the Format dialog you must select the File System: FAT32.

Select
“Format…”

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 101


Program Backup and Restore
Use this operation to back up and load (restore) program files, image files or save report data using an
SD or USB memory device.
The following SD & USB functions are available:
1 . P GM BAC K U P
2 . P GM RES T O RE
3 . R EP O RT S A VE
4 . I MA G E S A V E
5 . I MA G E L O A D
6 . B OO T UP S D ( AVA I L AB L E O N SD ONL Y )
7 . B OO T UP C OM (AV A I LA B LE O N S D ON L Y )
Additionally, Flash ROM updates can also be performed by SD card or through a serial connection to
a connected PC.
• The SD Card port is located in the printer compartment. Remove the security screw to
access the SD port. See “Inserting External SD Card” on page 14 for detail.
• The USB port is located on the connection panel on the back of the ECR. The USB port
must be assigned the “Memory” function to be used for backup utilities. See USB Setting”
on page 99.

Program Backup
It is a good practice to make note of the memory allocation settings when backing up a program file
so that it can be re-entered before restoring the program.
1. Set the store name at System Option #39 to the name of the store you want to create on your
memory device.
2. Insert an SD card in the register’s SD slot (located in the printer compartment) or connect a
USB drive on the USB port (located on the back, connection panel).
3. Move keylock to the SERVICE MODE.
4. From the Service Mode menu, select “7.PROGRAM BACKUP”. Press CASH.
5. The PROGRAM BACKUP menu displays:
P R O GR A M B A C KU P
1.SD
2 . U SB

6. From the PROGRAM BACKUP menu select “1.SD” or 2.USB.


7. From the USB or SD menu select “1.PGM BACKUP”.
a. The NR-500 Series will write the program files to the folder:
NR-500\STORENAME\PGMBACK
b. In the example below, the store name is “SAM4S”.
8. After a short pause, the register will display confirmation of the successful backup with the
message “SUCCESS !”. Below is an Explorer view of the backed-up files.

102 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Example Program Backup File
The NR-510 will write the backed-up program files to the selected removeable memory device to the
folder: NR-510\STORENAME\PGMBACK
Below is a File Explorer view of the backed-up files. In the example below, the store name is
“SAM4S”.

Note: The default store name is “STORE001”. You can edit this store name as desired. See
System Options programming on page 151 for more information about the store name.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 103


Restore Program
Set the store name on the NR-510 in System Options programming, option #39, to match the name of
the store folder you wish to restore.
CAUTION: Memory allocation must be set the same as the saved program.
1. Set the store name in System Option, option #39, to match the name of the store folder on
your memory device you wish to restore.
2. Insert an SD card in the register’s SD slot (located in the printer compartment) or connect a
USB drive on the USB port (located on the back, connection panel).
3. Move key lock to the SERVICE MODE.
4. From the Service Mode menu, select “7.PROGRAM BACKUP”. Press CASH.
5. The “PROGRAM BACKUP” menu displays:
P R O GR A M B A C KU P
1.SD
2 . U SB

6. From the PROGRAM BACKUP menu select “1.SD” or “2.USB”. Press CASH.
7. From the USB or SD menu select “2.PGM RESTORE”.
8. The register will display confirmation of the successful restoration with the message
“SUCCESS !”. If the restore is unsuccessful, the register will print a “FAIL !” error message.

Saving Reports
You can choose to save the current X1 report data from the NR-510 to a USB or SD memory device.
Reports can be saved as ‘CSV’ (spreadsheet format) or ‘REPORT’ format (to view with the eSpresso
PC utility).

Report Backup Notes


• When backing up and restoring data, the store name must be programmed in the “SYSTEM
Options” of “Options Programming”. The default store name is: “STORE001”.
• The NR-500 Series will write the program files to folder. For example:
NR-500/STORENAME/SALEBACK/CSVBACK/DATE/TIME
- or - NR-500/STORENAME/SALEBACK/REPBACK/DATE/TIME
• The date folder depends on date format option. See “SYSTEM Options” of “Options
Programming” in the "Program Mode Programming" chapter to set DATE FORMAT.
DATE FORMAT DATE FOLDER NAME
YYMMDD 20140403
DDMMYY 03042014
MMDDYY 04032014
• Each individual report is named with the time the report was taken. For example,
“CLK02332” represents a Clerk report taken at 23:32 (in a 24-hour time format.) In this
manner, multiple reports backed up at different times in the same day will collect in the same
“date” folder.

104 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


To Save Reports
1. Set an 8-character store name in System Option, option #39, to identify the store folder on
your memory device.
2. Insert an SD card in the register’s SD slot (located in the printer compartment) or connect a
USB drive on the USB port (located on the back connection panel).
3. Move to the SERVICE MODE.
4. From the Service Mode menu, select “7.PROGRAM BACKUP”; Press CASH.
5. From the PROGRAM BACKUP menu select “1.SD” or ‘2.USB”; Press CASH.
6. From the SD or USB menu select “3.REPORT SAVE”; Press CASH.
7. Select type 1.CSV FORMAT (Spreadsheet format) or 2.REP FORMAT (for SAM4s
eSpresso PC Utility format); Press CASH.
8. The register will display confirmation of the successful restoration with the message
“SUCCESS !”. If the save is unsuccessful, the register will print an error message.

Saved Report Examples

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 105


Load/Save Receipt Images
You can load a preamble and postamble image on your receipt or soft guest check. Before loading,
the images must be converted by the SAM4s PC Utility to .img format. After conversion, they can be
loaded directly by connecting a PC to the NR-500 Series or by copying the images to a SD card and
loading (or saving the image) using the SD utility program described here.
Note: After loading the images to the register, you must set the “LOGO Option” (Print preamble
image / Print postamble image) of the “Options Programming” in the “Program Mode Programming”
to activate the image printing.

Use the SAM4s PC Utility(eSpresso) to Convert the Image


1. Install the eSpresso on your PC and run it.
2. If you start the eSpresso for the first time, you must define the store and register, or if the
store and register is already defined, you can select the store from the register list. The
eSpresso program starts.
3. At the eSpresso, choose Image Logo from the Edit Program menu.
4. Click the FILE OPEN ( ) button. Select the image file that you wish to use from the Open
dialog and click the Open command button.
5. You can view the original and the converted image of a selected image.
6. You can change the properties of the image. (Sharpness and Brightness)
7. You can select the PREAMBLE IMAGE or POSTAMBLE IMAGE.

8. Click the DOWN ( ) button. “Download completed” message is displayed.


※ If you want to save the converted image, Click the SAVE ( ) button. (Saved images
are stored in My Documents folder.)

106 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Copy the Images to an SD Card
The PC Utility will create two image files:
• USERPRE.IMG
• USERPOST.IMG
They will be located in your PC at:
C:\Users\[Computer name]\Documents\eSpresso\[Store name]\[Register name]
Copy the images to the following path on your SD card:
SD\\NR-500\[Storename]\IMAGE
Important: In the path: C:\Users\[Computer name]\Documents\eSpresso\[Store name]\[Register
name], the store name and register name are the names you have defined as the store in the SAM4s
PC Utility.
Note: You must use the same store name in the NR-500 Series ECR at “Store name” of “SYSTEM
Options, option #39” of the “Options Programming” in the “Program Mode Programming”.
Also Note that the default store name is “STORE001”. When changing the Store Name, always use
an 8-character store name.

Saving Images
1. Set the store name in System Option, option #39, to match the name of the store folder on
your memory device you wish to restore.
2. Insert an SD card in the register’s SD slot (located in the printer compartment) or connect a
USB drive on the USB port (located on the back connection panel).
3. Move to the SERVICE MODE.
4. From the Service Mode menu, select “7.PROGRAM BACKUP”; Press CASH.
5. From the PROGRAM BACKUP menu select “1.SD” or “2.USB”; Press CASH.
6. From the USB or SD menu select “4.IMAGE SAVE”; Press CASH.
7. The message “SUCCESS !” will display on the LCD.

Loading Images
1. Insert an SD card in the register’s SD slot (located in the printer compartment) or connect a
USB drive on the USB port (located on the back connection panel).
2. Move to the SERVICE MODE.
3. From the Service Mode menu, select “7.PROGRAM BACKUP”; Press CASH.
4. From the PROGRAM BACKUP menu select “1.SD” or “2.USB”; Press CASH.
5. From the SD menu select “5.IMAGE LOAD”: Press CASH.
6. The message “SUCCESS !” will display on the LCD.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 107


Flash ROM Updates
The NR-500 Series register software is loaded in flash ROM. This program may occasionally be
updated by the manufacturer. Your SAM4S dealer can update the software if necessary. The Flash
ROM can be loaded through a PC or by SD card.
CAUTION: Flash ROM update by either method must be done by a qualified, trained
technician. DO NOT POWER OFF OR ABORT any program loading once it has started.
Failure to follow the procedures exactly may cause the program to load incompletely and for
the register to fail completely.

Flash ROM Update by SD


The NR-500 Series Flash ROM program is contained in a binary file. This file contains both the Boot
program area and the Application program area.
1. Copy binary file to the update folder of the SD card: SD:/update/NR_ROM.bin
2. Insert the SD card into the register. (The SD slot is located inside the printer compartment.
Remove the security screw and open the flap securing the SD slot. Insert the SD card until
you hear a click sound and the SD card is locked in.)

Boot Area Update


3. At the NR-500 Series, move to the SERVICE MODE.
4. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
7.PROGRAM BACKUP menu. Then select “1.SD”.
5. Select the 6.BOOT UP SD menu.
6. After a short pause, the register will display confirmation of the successful download with the
message “DOWNLOAD 100 % FINISHED! !.
7. Turn the ECR power switch OFF/ON and proceed directly to the next step: Application
Update.

Program Area Update


8. Set the SERVICE MODE.
9. Press the upper right key and the lower right key. A rapid beep-beep-beep sound will be
heard. Release the upper right key and the lower right key.
10. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
2.SD menu.
11. The display will flash (Current program is being erased) after a few seconds, the display will
continue to flash, but at a slower rate. This continues for about 1-minute while the new
program is being loaded. When the load is complete, a rapid beep-beep-beep sound will be
heard again the display will stop flashing and display a blue color to confirm update
completion.
12. Power the register OFF. The FLASH ROM update is complete.
13. Remove the SD card from the register.
14. Perform a memory all clear on the ECR (See ‘Clearing Memory’ procedure on page 25).
The ECR is now ready to program or to load a previously saved end-user program.

108 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Flash ROM Update by PC
To complete the firmware update via PC, you will need a serial PC cable, the Flash ROM update file
and the utility to load the file.

Update Files
To complete the firmware update, you will be supplied with the following files:
• DownLoad.exe (The update utility program)
• Binary file

PC Connection Cable
YOU MUST USE Port #1. Use the following cable:
• Register DB-9MF COM 1 to PC DB-9F

Boot Area Update


1. Connect the Serial Cable from ECR to PC.
2. At the register, move to the SERVICE MODE.
3. Press the ↓ key and the ↑ key to select “7.PROGRAM BACKUP” menu; Press CASH.
4. Then select “1.SD”; Press CASH.
5. Select the 7.BOOT UP COM menu; Press CASH.
6. At the PC, execute the program “DownLoad.exe”. The Download dialog box displays.

7. Select the appropriate com port connection at your PC at the PORT# option buttons.

8. Click find the folder where the update files are located and select binary file.
9. Select Boot Area Only in the Select One option buttons.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 109


10. Press OK Button. The download takes about 30 seconds; the scroll bar will track the
progress of the download. At the ECR, the display will flash slowly while the update is
taking place.
11. When complete, the message Completed displays on the PC. Click OK and the Download
program will close. At the ECR, the display will change to a blue color indicating the update
is complete. Turn the power switch to the OFF.

Program Area Update


1. Connect the Serial Cable from ECR to PC.
2. At the register, move to the SERVICE MODE.
3. Turn the power switch to the OFF position.
4. Press the upper right key and the lower right key. A rapid beep-beep-beep sound will be
heard. Release the upper right key and the lower right key.
5. Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
1.SERIAL1 menu.
6. At the PC, execute the program “Download.exe”. The Download dialog box displays.
7. Select the appropriate com port connection at your PC at the PORT# option buttons.

8. Click find the folder where the update files are located and select binary file.
9. Select Program code only in the Select One option buttons.
10. Press OK Button. The download takes about 3 minutes. At the PC, the scroll bar will track
the progress of the download. At the ECR, the display will flash (Current program is being
erased), after a few seconds, the display will continue to flash, but at a slower rate. This
continues for about 3 minutes while the new program is being loaded.
11. When complete, the message Completed displays at the PC. Click OK and the Download
program will close. At the ECR, when the load is complete, a rapid beep-beep-beep will be
heard, and the display will flash rapidly. Turn the power switch to OFF, the program update
is complete.
12. Disconnect the PC cable.
13. Perform a memory all clear on the ECR (See ‘Clearing Memory’ procedure on page 25).
The ECR is now ready to program or to load a previously saved end-user program.

110 • Service Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Help Menu
The help menu prints out Menu Operation keys (function keys used for program navigation). The
Function key list and the character code table can also be printed from this menu.

Menu Usage
1. Move the key lock to the SERVICE MODE.
2. From the Service Mode menu, select “8.HELP MENU”; Press CASH.
3. From the Help Menu, select “1.MENU USAGE”; Press CASH.
4. The “MENU OPERATION” list prints
CLEAR : EXIT or CANCEL
 : CURSOR UP MENU or
SELECT ‘YES’
 : CURSOR DOWN MENU or
SELCT ‘NO’
CASH : CONFIRM

Function Key Code


1. Move the key lock to the SERVICE MODE.
2. From the Service Mode menu, select “8.HELP MENU”; Press CASH.
3. From the Help Menu, select “2.FUNC. KEY CODE”; Press CASH.
4. The complete “FUNCTION KEY CODE” list prints.

Character Code
1. Move the key lock to the SERVICE MODE.
2. From the Service Mode menu, select “8.HELP MENU”; Press CASH.
3. From the Help Menu, select “3.CHAR CODE”; Press CASH.
4. The complete “CHAR. CODE TABLE” list prints.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Service Mode Programming • 111


Program Mode Programming

Overview
Most register programming takes place in program mode (the control lock is placed in the PGM
position.) Programs here include:
• PLU – Set PLU prices, descriptors and options. Also, assign PLU’s to groups, link to
other PLU’s, assign to mix and match groups, set stock levels and set additional
options
• Group – Groups collect sales from sets of items (PLU’s) Set descriptors and options
for groups here.
• Function Key – Set descriptors, entry limits and specific options related to each
function key you may be using.
• Options – Set options related to the operation of your register.
• Employee (Clerk) – Set names, codes and assignments for each clerk.
• Time – Set the register date and time.
• Taxes – Set tax rates or tables can be set for each of four possible taxes. Value added
taxes and GST (Canada) can be set.
• Messages – Set receipt messages and report descriptors
• Mix & Match – Set up discounts such as “buy 2 and get $1 off”.
• Program Scans – Print a record of you register program.

Default Programming
Each SAM4s ECR is ready to use after un-boxing, loading the paper and completing the memory all
clear procedure (see “Clearing Memory” on page 25.)
• All keyboard PLU’s are nontaxable and preset, with a “0” price.
• All system options are set to default. Change only the options that will deviate from
default programming.
• All programming (unless otherwise noted) is done with the control lock in the PGM
position. Each section details a specific area of register programming.

112 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Descriptor Programming Methods
Descriptors can be programmed for PLU’s, function keys, groups, clerks and the logo/messages.
Two methods are available to program descriptors, the Program Overlay Method and the Descriptor
Code Method. This chapter describes both methods. Refer to each program area for specific steps for
programming PLU’s, groups, function keys, etc.

Descriptor Overlay Method


This method is the default descriptor program method. When the descriptor field is selected on the
program screen, you can simply type the descriptor placing a copy of the overlay over the keyboard.
Press CASH to finalize your descriptor.

Program Example
To program the descriptor "20%" type:
2 0 SHIFT E%

To use BACK and program the descriptor "Apple" type:


A! CAPS P, P, P, BACK L+ E%

To program the descriptor "Apple" type:


A! CAPS P, P, L+ E%

NOTE: Use the CAPS key to toggle between upper and lower-case descriptor options.

To program the descriptor “APPLE” with DOUBLE (wide) characters type:


DOUBLE A! P, P, L+ E%

NOTE: Use the DOUBLE to toggle to between double and normal size descriptor options.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 113


Raised Keyboard Overlay

CLEAR CAPS 7 8 9 M] Q: U; W? Z■

SPACE C# F^ I/ 4 5 6 L[ P* T, V= Y

DOUBLE B@ E% H* 1 2 3 K) O+ S€ SHIFT X

BACK A! D$ G& 0 00 . J( N- R£ ENTER

PRICE PRICE

Flat Keyboard Overlay

€ £ ■ :

! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) EXIT

Q W E R T Y U I O P 7 8 9

A S D F G H J K L ; 4 5 6

Z X C V B N M , . / 1 2 3

+ - < > ? = CAPS DOUBLE SPACE


BACK 0 00 . ENTER
SPACE

114 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Descriptor Code Method
If you customize your keyboard by covering key locations, or by installing double or quad size keys,
you will need to program descriptors using the descriptor code method. See “SYSTEM Options” on
page 151. You must set the “DESC. PGM METHOD” option to be CODE TYPE.

Program Sequence
1. With the cursor pointed at a descriptor field, refer to the Descriptor Code Chart below and
type the code for the first character.
2. For each additional character, type the code. Each character will be displayed as it is entered.
3. Press CASH when the descriptor is complete.

Program Example
To program the descriptor "APPLE", type:
[065] [080] [080] [076] [069] [CASH]
A P P L E
For DOUBLE (wide) characters enter 999 after the descriptor code. For example:
A = [999] [065] [CASH]

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 115


Descriptor Code Table

Char. Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë
Code 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010
Char. è ï î ì Ä Å É æ Æ ô
Code 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020
Char. ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ▪ ₤ ¥
Code 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030
Char. € SPACE ! " # $ % & ' (
Code 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040
Char. ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
Code 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050
Char. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; <
Code 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060
Char. = > ? @ A B C D E F
Code 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070
Char. G H I J K L M N O P
Code 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080
Char. Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Code 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090
Char. a b c d
Code 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100
Char. e f g h i j k l m n
Code 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
Char. o p q r s t u v w x
Code 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
Char. y z BACK SPACE DOUBLE
Code 121 122 123 999
Char. Á á Ñ ñ Ã ã
Code 125 126 127 128 129 130

116 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Program Mode Menu
1. Move to the PROGRAM MODE. The PROGRAM MODE menu displays.
P R O GR A M M O D E
1 . P LU 
2 . G RO U P
3 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
4 . O PT I ONS
5 . E MP L OYE E
6 . T IM E
- P A GE 1/2 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
P R O GR A M M O D E
7 . T AX E S 
8 . M ES S AGE S
9 . M IX & M A T CH
1 0 . PG M SC A N

- P A GE 2/2 -

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 117


PLU Programming
To accommodate UPC barcode scanning, each PLU can be given an identifying number up to 14
digits in length.
1. At the PROGRAM MODE, press 1 and CASH for PLU Programming. The PLU
PROGRAMMING screen displays:
PLU
1 . A DD / CHA N G E 
2 . D EL E TE
3 . P LU STO C K
4 . N LU COD E # P G M

- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Use the ↓ and the ↑ keys to scroll up and down through the PLU menu. Or, you can enter the
digit (1-4) directly. Press CASH to enter the programming area.

118 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Add/Change PLU
Add/change One PLU
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen; Press 1 and CASH to add or change a PLU screen:
A D D /C H ANG E
1 . O NE PLU
2 . R AN G E P L U

2. Press 1 and CASH to select individual PLU. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
A D D /C H ANG E

E N T ER PLU #
0

3. Enter PLU number and CASH to select individual PLU. The PLU OPTION screen displays:
4. Refer to “PLU Options - Reference Information” on page 120 to make program entries or
changes, press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the previous screen.

Add/change Range PLU


1. From the ADD/CHANGE screen; Press 2 and CASH to select RANGE PLU. The PLU
NUMBER screen displays:
A D D /C H ANG E

E N T ER FRO M PL U #
0

2. Enter FROM PLU number and CASH to display TO PLU# screen:


A D D /C H ANG E

E N T ER FRO M PL U #
1
E N T ER TO P L U#
20

3. Enter TO PLU number and CASH to display PLU OPTIONS.


4. Refer to “PLU Options - Reference Information” on page 120 to make program entries or
changes, press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the previous screen.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 119


PLU Options - Reference Information

Option Entry Description


DESC Alpha You can program a descriptor for each PLU. Type the
numeric descriptor using the Program Overlay, or by using the
24 descriptor code method (see page115.) The overlay is
character automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at the
DESC field. The default descriptors are PLU1, PLU2, etc.
PRICE/HALO1 7-digit Up to five price levels are available. (Note that price level
PRICE/HALO2 amount fields 2 will display only if you allocate memory for
additional price levels.) If the PLU is open, the amount
entered here is the high amount lock out (HALO). You can
limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
entered into a PLU. If the PLU is preset, the amount entered
here is the amount that is registered automatically when the
PLU is entered.
PRESET Y or N Choose Y for a preset PLU. Choose N for an open PLU.
Open PLU’s accept amount entries. Use open PLU’s to enter
different priced items into the same PLU. Preset PLU’s
automatically register a preprogrammed price when the PLU
is entered. Use preset PLU’s to register an individual item
quickly and accurately. For example, cigarette packs can be
assigned to PLU’s.
PRESET OVERRIDE Y or N If Y, you can enter a price to override the preset price.
TAXable BY TAX1 Y or N Select N for non-taxable items. Select Y to apply the
TAXable BY TAX2 appropriate tax automatically for this PLU.
TAXable BY TAX3
TAXable BY TAX4
GROUP #1 0-99 For each of three group assignments, enter a group where this
GROUP #2 PLU's sales will accumulate. The number of groups available
GROUP #3 is determined by memory allocation.
NEGATIVE ITEM Y or N Select Y to register items that subtract, rather than add to the
sale total.
HASH Y or N Items designated with HASH status add to the current sale,
but do not add to the registers grand total. HASH items may
or may not add to the net sales total - see “SYSTEM Options”
of “Options Programming” in the “Program Mode
Programming” chapter. Use hash for lottery sales or bottle
deposits.
SINGLE ITEM Y or N Select Y for a single item PLU. Single item PLU’s
automatically total as a cash sale immediately after the PLU
entry. Single item PLU’s are used to speed up one item sales.
NON-ADD # COMP Y or N Select Y to enforce the entry of a non-add number before a
registration can be made.

120 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Option Entry Description
GALLONAGE ITEM Y or N Select Y to compute gallons sold. The gallons sold will print
along with the price entry on the receipt. The total gallons sold
will accumulate in the PLU counter. You must program the
price per gallon (in tenths of a cent, i.e. $1.299 for $1.29 and
9/10) in the PRICE/HALO field.
INVENTORY ITEM Y or N Select Y if you wish to track the number of items remaining in
inventory using the Stock report.
DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable the PLU. Entries cannot be made into
disabled PLU’s.
SCALABEL Y or N If Y, the PLU will work only when you are multiplying a
weight from an optional scale or when multiplying a manually
entered weight. (For example, enter weight, press SCALE,
then register PLU.)
AUTO SCALE Y or N Select Y if you wish entries into this PLU to be automatically
multiplied by the weight on the optional scale.
CONDIMENT Y or N Select Y if you wish the item to act like a condiment on the
kitchen printer. Items with this status will satisfy the
requirements of items with compulsory condiment status.
COMPULSORY Y or N Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a condiment after
CONDIMENT this item is entered.
PRINT ON RECEIPT Y or N Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item on the
receipt.
DISPLAY PLU Y or N Select Y if you wish the PLU to show on the display.
PRINT ON CHECK Y or N Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item on the
check.
PRT PRICE ON Y or N Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item's price on
RECEIPT the receipt.
PRT PRICE ON Y or N Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item's price on
CHECK the check.
DISABLE PROMO Y or N Select Y to block the PROMO function on this PLU.
COUNTER NOT Y or N Select Y if you do not wish to reset the PLU item counter on
RESET the Z PLU report.
PRESET OVERRIDE Y or N If preset override is Y, then you can force manager control for
IN MGR CONTROL preset override by setting this option to Y.
DISABLE RETURN Y or N If Y, you cannot correct this PLU through void operations
& VOID (Void Item/ Error Correct/VOID Mode) or perform a
merchandise return of this PLU item. The Y value is
recommended when using liquor control systems.
PRICE CHANGE Y or N Select Y to change price on this PLU.
ITEM
ALLOW Y or N Select Y to allow Discounts on this PLU.
DISCOUNTS
PRINT ON Y or N Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item's price on
JOURNAL the journal.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 121


Option Entry Description
PRINT PRICE ON Y or N Select N if you wish to suppress printing of the item's price on
JOURNAL the journal.
AUTO TARE 1-5 Select Y if you wish entries into this PLU to be automatically
multiplied by the weight on the optional scale.
MIX & MATCH 0-99 Enter a value (1-99) to indicate the number of the
preprogrammed MIX&MATC TABLE. Enter 0 to disable
LINK PLU: 14 digits If you wish the registration of this PLU to automatically cause
maximum the registration of another PLU, enter the PLU # you wish to
link with the 10-key pad. Enter 0 for no link.
QTY/MODIFIER1 0-99.99 Enter quantity modifier count.
QTY/MODIFIER2
MINIMUM STOCK 0-9999.99 Enter Minimum Stock amount.

122 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Delete PLU
Note: Before a PLU can be deleted, all report information must be cleared. It may be necessary
to run a Z1 and Z2 PLU Report, and if the PLU is an inventory item, you must change the stock
to zero.
If PLU’s had been registered by using the NOT FOUND PLU function, RESET N.F. PLU must
be issued. See page 74 for details.

Delete One PLU


1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press 2 and CASH to display the DELETE PLU
screen:
D E L ET E
1 . O NE PLU
2 . R AN G E P L U

2. Press 1 and CASH to delete an individual PLU. The PLU NUMBER screen displays:
D E L ET E

E N T ER PLU #
0

3. Enter the number of the PLU you wish to delete and press CASH. The DELETE message
will print.

Delete PLU Range


1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press 2 and CASH for to display the DELETE
PLU screen:
D E LE T E
1 . O NE PLU
2 . R AN G E P L U

2. Press 2 and CASH to delete a range of PLU’s. The PLU NUMBER screen displays: Enter
the number of FROM PLU# in the range you wish to delete. Press CASH.
D E LE T E

E N T ER FRO M PL U #
0

3. Enter the number of TO PLU# in the range you wish to delete.


D E L ET E

E N T ER FRO M PL U #
1
E N T ER TO P L U #
20

4. Press CASH to delete the PLU. The DELETE message will print.
5. Continue to delete other PLU’S or press CLEAR key until you are returned to the
PROGRAM MODE menu.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 123


PLU STOCK
Note: Before program PLU stock, ‘Inventory Item’ option set as ‘Y’ in PLU programming.
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING screen, press3 and CASH to display the PLU STOCK
screen:
P L U S T OCK
1 . O NE
2 . R AN G E

2. Select the PLU or PLU’s you wish to program one of the following ways.

ONE PLU
1. From the PLU STOCK screen, press 1 and CASH to add an individual PLU. The PLU
NUMBER screen display:
S T O CK ENT R Y

E N T ER PLU #
0

RANGE PLU
1. From the PROGRAM screen, press 2 and CASH to display RANGE PLU screen.
S T O CK ENT R Y

E N T ER FRO M PL U #
0

2. Enter FROM PLU# number and CASH to display TO PLU# screen:


S T O CK ENT R Y

E N T ER FRO M PL U #
1
E N T ER TO P L U#
20

3. Enter TO PLU# number and CASH to display STOCK ENTRY screen:


S T O CK ENT R Y

O P E RA T OR: A DD ( +)
AD D ( +)

4. Select operator ADD (+), SUB (-) or REPLACE.


5. Enter the stock quantity you wish to ADD/SUBTRACT/REPLACE, and press CASH. Note
that stock is kept in decimal units and you must enter new or additional stock to two digits
beyond the decimal. For example, type 1 0 0 0 to enter ten units of inventory.
6. To program additional PLU’s repeat step 5 or press CLEAR key to finalize.

124 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


NLU Code# Program
NLUs are fixed keys on the keyboard (like traditional department keys) that access specific PLU’s.
On the default keyboard the PLU# assigned to the NLU key is the same, i.e. NLU key number one is
PLU #1. However, with this program, you can assign any PLU number you wish to any one of the
NLU keys.
1. From the PLU PROGRAMMING menu, press 4 and CASH for NLU CODE# PGM. The
NLU CODE PROGRAM screen displays:
N L U C O DE# P GM

E N T ER NLU K EY

2. Press the NLU key on the keyboard you wish to program or press CLEAR to exit.
N L U C ODE # PG M
NLU# 1

E N T ER NEW P LU #
0

3. The current PLU code number displays. Type the new PLU code number you wish to use for
this NLU key, press CASH.
4. The NLU CODE PROGRAM screen returns. Continue from step 1 to program additional
NLU keys or press CLEAR to exit.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 125


Group Programming
Up to 99 groups (the exact number is determined by memory allocation) are available to summarize
PLU sales. Group totals appear on reports, so that you can track sales of different types of items.
• The group descriptors programmed here will replace the default descriptors GROUP 1
through GROUP 99 that appear on reports.
• Each PLU can report totals to one, two or three different groups. If a PLU sends totals to
more than one group, the group total that appears on the Group report will not represent PLU
sales. Therefore, you also have the option of deciding whether each group's total will add to
the group total on the Group report.

To Program Groups
1. At the PROGRAM MODE, press 2 and CASH for GROUP. The GROUP
PROGRAMMING screen displays: (The maximum group number is set by memory
allocation.)
G R OU P

E N T ER GRO U P #
( 1 - 10 ) 0

2. Enter the number of the group to be programmed, press the CASH. The GROUP#
PROGRAMMING screen displays:
G R OU P
1 . D ES C : [ GR O UP 01]
2 . A DD TO G R OU P TO T A L [Y]
3 . S EN D TO K P [N]
4 . K P P ORT # : R C PT [N]
5 . K P P ORT # : 1 [N]
6 . K P P ORT # : 2 [N]

G R OU P
7 . P RI N T R E D O N KP [N]

3. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑key and page↓ key. Select the Group option you wish to program.
4. Press the ↑ key for YES and the ↓ key for NO.
Press CLEAR to return to the GROUP PROGRAMMING screen. Continue to program
groups as necessary. Press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM MODE screen.

126 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Group Programming - Reference Information
Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha You can program a descriptor for each group. Type the
numeric descriptor using the Program Overlay or by using the
24 descriptor code method (see page 115.). The overlay is
character automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at
the DESC field. The default descriptors are GROUP 01,
GROUP 02, etc.
ADD TO GROUP TOTAL Y or N Select N if you do not wish this groups total to be added
to the total of all groups on the Group report.
SEND TO KP Y or N Select Y if you wish to send PLU’s reporting to this
group to a kitchen printer.
KP PORT #: RECEIPT Y or N Select Y if you wish to print a kitchen requisition at the
register.
KP PORT #: 1 Y or N Select Y if you wish to print a kitchen requisition at the
Port1.
KP PORT #: 2 Y or N Select Y if you wish to print a kitchen requisition at the
Port2.
PRINT RED ON KP Y or N Select Y if you wish items reporting to this group to
print in red on the kitchen printer. (Note, the kitchen
printer must have red/black printing capability, and this
option does not apply to the register receipt printer.)

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 127


Function Key Programming
Use to set specific options for function keys. Because of the differences inherent in function keys,
individual options will be different. See the specific instructions for each key in this chapter to find
the options for each key.
1. From the PROGRAM MODE, press 3 and CASH for FUNCTION KEY. The FUNCTION
KEY PROGRAM screen displays:
F U N CT I ON K E Y
1 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
2 . M AC R O K E Y

- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Press 1 and CASH to select FUNCTION KEY menu.


F U N CT I ON K E Y
E N T ER FUN C . KE Y
T O BE PRO G R AM M ED

3. Press the function key you wish to program.


4. For example, Press the #/NS key to view the #/NS function key options:
5. Press the ↓ key to view the next menu. Press the ↑ key to view the previous menu. Press the
PAGE↓ key to view the next page. Press the PAGE↑ key to view the previous page.
6. Press the CASH to set option value.
7. From the YES/No type option screen, Press the ↑ key for YES and the ↓ key for NO. Press
the CASH to confirm the option value.
8. Press CLEAR at any time to return to the FUNCTION KEY menu without saving changes.

128 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


#/NS Function Options
Option Entry Description
DESC1 Alpha numeric You can program a unique descriptor for the no sale function. The
24 character default descriptor is NOSALE.
DESC2 Alpha numeric You can program a unique descriptor for the non add # function.
24 character The default descriptor is NON ADD #.
#/NS DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable the no sale function (non-add entries are
allowed).
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y to allow operation only in manager operation mode.
CONTROL
INHIBIT NO SALE Y or N Select Y if you want to disable the NO SALE function after a non-
AFTER NON-ADD # add number is entered.
COMP. # AT START Y or N Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add number at
OF SALE the beginning of each transaction. (For example, to track the
number of customers in each sale or to identify a customer number
with each sale.)
PRINT ON N/S Y or N Select N to stop printing when a NO SALE is performed.
NON-ADD # Y or N Select Y to disable the non-add # function.
PROHIBIT
COMP NON-ADD # Y or N Select Y if you wish all non-add number entries to have the exact
MUST MATCH number of digits selected in the MAX DIGIT flag below.
MAX DIGIT
MAX DIGIT 0-8 Enter the maximum number of digits for non-add number entry.
Zero (0) means no limit.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 129


%1 -%5 Function Options
Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha numeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character % 1-4.
AMOUNT:Y %:N Y or N Select Y if you wish for this key to apply an amount (as in a
coupon). Select N if you wish for this key to apply the percentage
(as in a discount or surcharge).
AMOUNT/RATE 5 digits If the function is an amount, enter the amount from 0 to 999.99. If
not zero, the amount will be the preset coupon amount. If the
function is a percentage, enter a percentage from 0 to 99.999%. If
not zero, the percentage will be the preset percentage
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER mode. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
OPEN:Y PRESET:N Y or N Select Y if you wish the amount or percentage to be entered by the
operator; select N if you wish the amount or percentage to be
preset.
SALE:Y ITEM:N Y or N Select Y if you wish the amount or percentage to apply to the sale
total. Select N if you wish the amount or percentage to apply to an
item.
OVERRIDEABLE Y or N Select Y if you wish to enter a percentage or amount to override the
preset percentage or amount set in the RATE field.
POS.:Y NEG.:N Y or N Select Y if you wish for the amount or percentage to add to the sale
total. Select N if you wish for the amount or percentage to subtract
from the sale.
TAXable BY TAX1 Y or N Select N to tax any taxable items before the discount or surcharge is
TAXable BY TAX2 applied (tax the gross amount). Select Y to tax any taxable items
TAXable BY TAX3 after the discount or surcharge is applied (tax the net amount).
TAXable BY TAX4
ALLOW ONLY ONE TIME Y or N If Y, you can enter only a single coupon and you must press the
SUBTOTAL ENTRY SUBTOTAL key before the coupon entry.
ALLOW MULTIPLE Y or N If you set a % key to be used for vendor coupons (i.e. amount,
AMOUNT DISCOUNT negative and sale status) then choose Y to allow the function to be
(COUPON) WITHOUT operated multiple times, without requiring the SUBTOTAL key to
SUBTOTAL ENTRY be pressed prior to the coupon entry.
PRESET OVERRIDE IN Y or N Select Y to allow preset override only in manager operation mode.
MGR ONLY
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to a Serial port.

130 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


ADD CHECK Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha numeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character ADD CHECK.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
COMPULSORY Y or N Select Y if you want to force the operator to use the ADD CHECK
BEFORE TENDERING function before tendering.
ADVANCE THE Y or N Select Y if you want to advance the consecutive number each time
CONSECUTIVE # the ADD CHECK key is used.
DELETE THE Y or N Select Y if you want to delete the preamble and postamble each time
PRE/POSTAMBLE the ADD CHECK key is used.
EXEMPT TAX 1 Y or N Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when finalized
EXEMPT TAX 2 with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

CANCEL Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character CANCEL.
HALO 7-digits You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
(amount) used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 131


CASH Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha numeric 24 You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
Character CASH.
HALO 7-digit amount You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND Y or N Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the tendered
COMP. amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than the
TENDER IN MGR amount of the sales and issues to be changed. When selected, over
CONTROL and under tendering is allowed only in the MANAGER MODE.
DISABLE UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than the
TEND. amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER Y or N Select N if you do not want the drawer to be opened with this key.
OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1 Y or N Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
EXEMPT TAX 2 finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
VALIDATION validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

132 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


CHARGE 1-8 Keys Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character CHARGE 1-8.
HALO 7-digit amount You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND Y or N Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the tendered
COMP. amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than the
TENDER IN MGR amount of the sale and issue change. When selected, over
CONTROL tendering is allowed only in the MANAGER MODE.
DISABLE UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than the
TEND. amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER Y or N Select N if you do not want the drawer to be opened with this key.
OPEN
ALLOW OVER Y or N Select Y if you wish to allow tender greater than the amount of the
TEND. sale.
NON-ADD # ENTRY Y or N Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add number prior
COMPULSORY to tendering.
EXEMPT TAX 1 Y or N Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
EXEMPT TAX 2 finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
VALIDATION validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
ALLOW Y or N Select Y if you wish to allow rounding when pressing the
ROUNDING CHARGE1~CHARGE8 keys.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 133


CHECK Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character CHECK.
HALO 7-digit amount You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
AMOUNT TEND Y or N Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the tendered
COMP. amount and let the register calculate the change.
OVER/UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than the
TENDER IN MGR amount of the sale and issue change. When selected, over
CONTROL tendering is allowed only in the MANAGER MODE.
DISABLE UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than the
TEND. amount of the sale.
DOES DRAWER Y or N Select N if you do not want the drawer to be opened with this key.
OPEN
EXEMPT TAX 1 Y or N Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
EXEMPT TAX 2 finalized with this key.
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce check endorsement if an optional printer with
CHECK endorsement capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
ENDORSEMENT
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
VALIDATION validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

CHECK CASHING Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character CHKCASH.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce check endorsement if an optional printer with
CHECK validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
ENDORSEMENT

134 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


CHECK ENDORSEMENT Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character CHKENDOR.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
PRINT CHECK AMT Y or N Choose Y to print the amount of check as well as the endorsement
IN THE message. Choose N to print only the endorsement message.
ENDORSEMENT Note: A 10-line check endorsement message may be programmed.
See “Endorsement” programming on page 174 for more
information.
PRINT DATE Y or N Select N to suppress printing Date on the check endorsement.
PRINT TIME Y or N Select N to suppress printing Time on the check endorsement.
PRINT CLERK Y or N Select N to suppress printing the Clerk name on the check
endorsement.
PRINT Y or N Select N to suppress printing the Consecutive number on the check
CONSECUTIVE No endorsement.
SLIP OUTPUT PORT 0-2 If validation is used, identify the communications port (1 or 2)
where the validating printer is attached. Enter 0 if validation is not
used.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 135


CHECK # Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character CHKTRACK.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
COMPULSORY FOR Y or N Select Y you must begin a new or recall an existing tracking
ALL SALES number before registering items.
OPENING CLERK Y or N If Y, the clerk that begins a tracking number is the only clerk who
HAS EXCLUSIVE can recall a check. If N, any clerk can recall any check.
ACCESS
PRINT ON RECEIPT Y or N If N, the check track number and balance will not print on the
receipt.
PRINT CHECK ON Y or N If N, the check track number and balance will not print on the
RP remote.
ALLOW ONLY ONE Y or N If Y, you can begin only one check with the same table #.
CHK PER TABLE
CHECK # Y or N If Y, press the CHECK. # key to automatically assign the next
ASSIGNED BY sequential check. Check numbers will begin with #1 and continue
REGISTER until the open check report is reset, at which point the check
number will be reset and start from #1 again.
PBAL IS USED Y or N If you wish to implement a drive thru recall key, this setting
D/THRU RECALL changes the function of the PBAL key to that of a recall key. Press
the PBAL key directly to automatically recall the open check with
the lowest tracking number
LENGTH OF 0-9 Set the length of check in number of digits. For example, if 4, then
CHECK checks must be used in the range from 1000, to 9999. This setting
applies to only check numbers input by the operator, not to check
numbers assigned by the register.

136 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


CURRENCY CONVERSION 1-4

Currency Exchange Rate Programming Examples


Note: Foreign currency exchange rates can be stated as “foreign currency in dollars”, or
“dollars in foreign currency”. Use the rate stated in “dollars in foreign currency” when you are
programming this section.
The US dollar (home currency) is worth 1.3720 Canadian dollars (foreign currency).
RATE: 13720 NUMBER OF DEC.: 4
The US dollar (home currency) is worth 110.24 Japanese Yen (foreign currency).
RATE: 11024 NUMBER OF DEC.: 2

CURRENCY CONVERSION 1-4 Keys Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor for each foreign currency.
24 character The default descriptors are CONV 1-4.
EXCHANGE 7 digits Enter the exchange rate of up to 7 digits (do not enter the decimal
RATE point). See the examples.
DECIMAL PLACE 0-4 Enter a number from 0 to 4 to indicate the decimal position of the
exchange rate. Count the decimal position from the right. See the
examples below.

EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, DRIVE THRU Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character EATIN, TAKE OUT and DRIVE THRU.
EXEMPT TAX 1 Y or N If you wish to automatically exempt a tax for a particular type of
EXEMPT TAX 2 sale, select Y for the appropriate tax. For example, if items are
EXEMPT TAX 3 non-taxable for take-out, but taxable for eat-in, set this program
EXEMPT TAX 4 to exempt tax on take out sales.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
VALIDATION validation capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 137


ERROR CORRECT Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character ERRCORR.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

GUEST Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character GUEST.
COMPULSORY FOR Y or N Select Y to enforce an entry into the GUEST # key before a tracking
GUEST CHECK number can be accessed for the first time.
COMPULSORY FOR Y or N Select Y to enforce an entry into the GUEST # key before an item
ALL SALES can be registered on any sale.
PRINT AT REMOTE Y or N Select N if you do not want GUEST # entry to print at the kitchen
PRINTER printer when items from the same transaction are sent to the KP.

138 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


PRICE LEVEL 1-2 Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character LEVEL1, LEVEL2, etc.
SEND Y or N Determines whether the level descriptor will be printed with the
DESCRIPTION TO item at the KP.
KP
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
PRINT ON GUEST Y or N Select Y to print level descriptor on Guest Check.
CHECKS
PRINT ON RECEIPT Y or N Select Y to print level descriptor on receipt.
PREVENT ZERO Y or N Select Y if you do not want register zero price items.
PRICE SALE
ALTERNATIVE 0-2 Choose price level to use if PLU price is zero.
ZERO PRICE
LEVLE

RETURN Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character MDSE RETURN.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 139


MODIFIER 1-5 Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character MOD1 - MOD5.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
AFFECT PLU # Y or N Select Y, if you wish the modifier entry to modify the PLU and
cause a different item/price to be registered. Select N to only add
the modifier descriptor.
PRINT ON RECEIPT Y or N Select N to suppress printing of the modifier descriptor on the
receipt.
AFFECT DIGIT OF 1-14 Preceding a PLU with a Size and/or Modifier key manipulates the
PLU # PLU code assigned to the PLU key, causing a different PLU to be
registered when the PLU key is pressed. Enter the digit of the PLU
number you wish to be changed when using this key. (Digit #1 is
the rightmost digit; digit #14 is the leftmost digit.)
VALUE OF 0-9 Enter the value you wish to be added in the digit position selected.
AFFECTED DIGIT For example, if you wish to affect PLU digit #4 with a value of 1,
(0-9) then pressing this modifier key prior to the registration of PLU #17
will result in the registration of PLU #1017.

PBAL Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character PBAL.
ENTER ANY TIME Y or N Select Y to allow the PBAL entry at any time. Select N to allow a
PBAL entry only at the start of a sale.
REQUIRE AT START Y or N Select Y to require an entry into the PBAL key at the start of every
OF SALE transaction.

140 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


PAID OUT 1-3 Keys Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
numeric PO 1-3.
24 character
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

PRINT CHECK Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character PRINT CHECK.
CHECK PRINT 0-2 Select the port (1 or 2) where the check print printer is attached. If
COMM PORT # (0-2) 0 is selected, the check will print on the receipt printer.
AUTO SERVICE Y or N Select Y if you want the Check Print function to automatically
CHK service the check.
PRT CHECK ON Y or N Select Y if you want the Check Print function to print on the receipt
RECEIPT printer.
SKIP PRT OF Y or N Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the consecutive # on
CONSEC# ON the guest check.
CHECK

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 141


PROMO Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character PROMO.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
TAXABLE BY TAX1 Y or N If an item is taxable and you wish to remove taxes and a cost of the
TAXABLE BY TAX2 item when using the PROMO key, set the taxable status for the
TAXABLE BY TAX3 appropriate tax to Y.
TAXABLE BY TAX4

RECD ON ACCT 1-3 Keys Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character RA 1-3.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

142 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


SCALE Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character SCALE.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
KEY IS MAN. Y or N Select Y if you wish to scale key to enter a manual weight. Select N
ENTRY if you wish to automatically recall the weight from the attached
scale.
TARE-WEIGHT Y or N Select Y if you wish to enforce the subtraction of a tare weight on
COMP. the scale entry.
ALLOW DOLLAR Y or N Select Y to allow open price entry on scalable items. (Not auto-
ENTRY ON scale)
SCALABLE ITEM
MANUAL SYMBOL LB, Select KG if you wish to use the weight symbol Kg (kilogram). LB
KG, for pound / KG for kilogram / OZ for ounce measurements.
OZ

SERVICE Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha numeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character SERVICE.
NON-ADD # COMP Y or N Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a non-add number (i.e. a
tax exempt #) before the key is used
PRINT ON RECEIPT Y or N Select N to not print on the receipt.
NEGATIVE Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
BALANCE IN MGR REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
CONTROL the MANAGER MODE.
CALCULATE TAX1 Y or N Select Y to calculate and add the appropriate tax automatically when
CALCULATE TAX2 finalized with this key.
CALCULATE TAX3
CALCULATE TAX4
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.
HARD CHECK 0-2 If you are using a hard check system, enter the RS232C port number
PRINTER PORT (1 or 2) where the optional guest check printer is attached.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 143


SUBTOTAL Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alpha You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
numeric SUBTOTAL.
24 character
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.

TABLE Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character TABLE.
ENFORCE ON Y or N If Y, you must enter the table number before opening a new check
CHECK TRACK track #.
ENFORCE ON ALL Y or N If Y, you must enter the table number before beginning any
SALES transaction.
PRINT AT REMOTE Y or N Choose Y to print the table number at the remote printer.
PRINTER

TARE Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character TARE.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
#5 IS MANUAL Y or N Choose Y to use tare number five to manually enter a tare weight.
TARE

144 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


TAX EXEMPT Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character TAXEXMT.
EXEMPT TAX 1 Y or N Select Y or N for each tax to determine which tax or taxes are
EXEMPT TAX 2 exempted when this key is used.
EXEMPT TAX 3
EXEMPT TAX 4
NON-ADD # COMP Y or N Select Y if you wish to force the entry of a non-add number (i.e. a
tax exempt #) before the key is used.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

TIP Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is TIP.
24 character
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
Select 0 if the tip is to be a calculated percentage based on a
AMOUNT : Y / % : N Y or N
percentage entry. Select 1 if the TIP is to be an amount entry.
ADD TAX RATE1 Y or N Choose Y to if tax is calculated and added on the tip amount.
ADD TAX RATE2
ADD TAX RATE3
ADD TAX RATE4
TIP ADDED TO NET Y or N Choose Y if you wish to add the TIP total to the NET and GROSS
& GROSS sales totals on the financial report.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 145


VOID Key Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character VOID.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator use of this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

WASTE Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character WASTE.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can be
amount used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator use of this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.
COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with validation
VALIDATION capability is connected to an RS-232C port.

ALPHA TEXT Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character ALPHA TEXT.
PRINT ON KP Y or N Select Y to print text on Kitchen Printer.
PRINT ON RECEIPT Y or N Select Y to print text on register.
PRINT ON GUEST Y or N Select Y to print text on Guest Check.
CHECKS
PRINT DOUBLE Y or N Select Y to print text with double size font.
SIZE

146 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


AUTO CASH 1-8 Keys Program Notes
Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor
24 character is AUTO CASH1-8.
HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
amount be used with this function. "0" means that there is no entry
limit.

PRICE CHANGE Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character PRICE CHG.
PRICE CHANGE NONE Choose N if you do not want to disable the function. Select YES if
YES you want to save the price. Select PROMPT you can show message
PROMPT before save the new price.

KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.


UNDER MANAGER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to use this function in
CONTROL REGISTER MODE. When selected, the function is allowed only in
the MANAGER MODE.

VALIDATION Key Program Notes


Option Entry Description
DESC Alphanumeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptor is
24 character PRICE CHG.
SLIP OUTPUT PORT 0-2 If validation is used, identify the communications port (1-2) where
the validating printer is attached. Enter 0 if validation is not used.
KEY DISABLE Y or N Select Y to disable this function.
ALLOW MULTIPLE Y or N Select Y to allow multiple validations of the same transaction.
RECEIPT

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 147


Macro Key Programming
Macro keys may be programmed to perform up to 50 keystrokes. For example, a macro key could be
set to tender (preset tender) a common currency, such as $5 into the cash key. Use this program to
record keystrokes for each of the 10 possible macro keys.
NOTE: PAGE↑, PAGE↓, ↑, ↓ keys are used for navigating through menu selections and settings
when in the X, Z, P, S-Mode so, the Macro Key must be assigned to different locations than where
these navigation functions reside (PAGE↑, PAGE↓, ↑, ↓).

To Program a Macro
1. From the PROGRAM MODE, press 3 and CASH for FUNCTION KEY. The FUNCTION
KEY PROGRAM screen displays:
F U N CT I ON K E Y
1 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
2 . M AC R O K E Y

2. From the FUNCTION KEY screen, press 2 and CASH for MACRO. The MACRO
PROGRAM screen displays:
M A C RO KEY

E N T ER MAC R O K E Y
T O BE PRO G R AM M ED

3. Press the macro key (MACRO1 – MACRO10) that you wish to program. The screen
displays Macro descriptor.
M A C RO KEY
DESC :
MA C R O1

4. Type in a new descriptor if desired. Press the CASH key to proceed to the Macro key
sequence programming. (Pressing CLEAR will return to the Macro selection screen.)
5. The screen displays the first macro line:
M A C RO 1
ENTER FUNC.KEY
1:
[ H EL P ] E N TE R SA M E M A CRO K EY
T O F I NIS H PR O GRA M

Key Lock Mode Information: The default mode is PGM mode. If you wish the macro to start in
REG mode, first turn the key lock before recording keystrokes. You can turn the key lock again to
another key position if necessary during the recording of the macro. You must return the key lock to
the PGM mode to finalize the macro recording.

148 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


6. Press the first key of the macro sequence; continue entering all keystrokes. You can type up
to 50 keystrokes including the Mode information.
M A C RO 1

E N T ER FUN C . KE Y
3: C A SH

7. Press the same MACRO key to end the sequence. You are returned to the Macro key
selection screen.
8. Continue to program additional MACRO keys or press CLEAR key to return to PROGRAM
MODE screen.

To Remove a Macro
If you wish to remove a key stroke from a macro, replace the current function with the ‘INACTIVE’
function. (Function key code 458)
NOTE: PAGE↑, PAGE↓, ↑, ↓ keys are used for navigating through menu selections and settings
when in the X, Z, P, S-Mode so, the Macro Key must be assigned to different locations than where
these navigation functions reside (PAGE↑, PAGE↓, ↑, ↓).

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 149


Options Programming
Options are organized into different categories, i.e. System, Print, Report, etc. to make it easier for the
programmer to find and set options.
1. At the PROGRAM MODE, press 4 and CASH for OPTIONS Programming. The
OPTIONS screen displays:
O P T IO N S
1 . S YS T EM 
2 . P RI N T
3 . R EP O RT
4 . T AX
5 . C UR R ENC Y
6 . R OU N DIN G

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
O P T IO N S
7 . L OG O 
8 . K IT C HEN P RN
9 . B AR C ODE
1 0 . EJ
1 1 . TR A IN M O DE
1 2 . TA B LE

O P T IO N S
1 3 . DE T AIL P RI N T

3. Select PRINT programming. The PRINT screen display:


P R I NT
1 . P RI N T DATE [ Y]
2 . P RI N T TIME [ Y]
3 . P RI N T M A C HI N E N O [ Y]
4 . P RI N T C L E RK NAM E [ Y]
5 . P RI N T C O N SE C UTI V E NO [ Y]
6 . P RI N T S A L E I TEM N O [ N]

4. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select option and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select option by page↑key and page↓ key.
5. Select PRINT DATE option.
P R I NT

P R I NT DAT E Y
S E LE C T : U P, D OWN
C H AN G E : C AS H
C A NC E L : C LE A R

6. Press the ↑ key for YES and the ↓ key for NO.
Press the CASH to confirm the option value and return option screen.

150 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


SYSTEM Options
System Option Entry Description
1. BEEPER ACTIVE Y or N Select N for a silent keyboard.
2. CLERK ENTRY PUSH Select PUSH for a push button clerk, select CODE for a
CODE code entry clerk system (number - clerk or clerk - number -
clerk) sequence.
3. CLERK IS STAY Select Y for pop-up clerks, select N for stay down clerks.
DOWN With pop-up clerks, you must sign on for each transaction.
POP-UP With stay down clerks, the same clerk remains signed on
until sign off.
4. CLERK Y or N If allowed, a new clerk can be signed on in the middle of a
INTERRUPT transaction. In this circumstance, the initial transaction is
suspended. When the interrupt transaction is completed, the
suspended transaction can be continued.
5. DECIMAL PLACE 0-3 Enter a digit to place the decimal point the selected number
of positions from the right.
6. DATE FORMAT IS MMDDYY Select date printing format.
DDMMYY
YYMMDD
7. DESC. PGM OVERLAY When OVERLAY TYPE, program descriptors by pressing
METHOD CODE the appropriate key on the program overlay. When CODE
TYPE, program descriptors by typing the code for each
descriptor character.
8. DRAWER MUST Y or N Select Y to enforce closed drawer for register operations.
BE SHUT TO SALE
9. ACTIVATE OPEN Y or N Select Y if you want the error tone to automatically sound
DRAWER ALARM when the drawer stays open longer than the time set in the
following field.
10. DRAWER OPEN 0-99 If you enable the open drawer alarm above, you can set the
TIME length of time (1-99 seconds) before the alarm sounds.
11. ALLOW POST Y or N Select Y to allow re-tendering should a second change
TENDER calculation be necessary. Re-enter the tendered amount and
press the CASH key to show the new change computation.
12. OPEN DRAWER Y or N If you enable post tendering, select N to not open the cash
ON POST TENDER drawer after the second tender.
13. GLOBAL ENTRY 0-14 Enter a digit to determine the number of numeric digits that
LIMIT can be entered for any register function. Enter 0 for no
limit.
14. ALLOW Y or N Set to Y if you wish to issue more than one copy of a
MULPTIPLE transaction receipt.
RECEIPT
15. DEACTIVATE Y or N If N, both multiplication and split pricing calculations can
SPLIT PRICING be done with the X/TIME key. If Y, only multiplication can
be done with the X/TIME key.
16. ALLOW DIRECT Y or N If Y, you can multiply preset items by simply entering the
MULTIPLY quantity, then pressing the preset PLU key.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 151


System Option Entry Description
17. DIRECT Y or N If you allow direct multiplication of a preset PLU, you can
MULTIPLY OVER allow only single digit multiplication or multiplication by
ONE DIGIT more than one digit.
18. TRIPLE Y or N YES allows multiple multiplication, for example, 2
MULTIPLICATION X/TIME, 3 X/TIME, ITEM. Note that multiple
multiplication overrides split pricing.
19. DISPLAY ADD Y or N When Y, the customer display shows a total of the item and
PRICE OF LINKED linked item. For example, if PLU is $1.00 and is linked to
ITEMS PLU2 which is $0.25, the customer display will show
$1.25.
20. PROMPT FOR Y or N Select Y to allow the operator to enter PLU price of zero
PRICE IF PRICE = price.
0.00
21. COMPULSORY Y or N Select Y if you want to force the operator to use the
SUBT.BEFORE SUBTOTAL function before tendering.
TENDER
22. ENABLE NOT Y or N Select Y to allow the operator to enter PLU prices and other
FOUND PLU data when the entered PLU number is not found in the PLU
file.
23. NEGATIVE SALE Y or N Select Y if you wish to control negative transactions (when
MGR ONLY cash is removed from the drawer). When selected mode
position must be in the Manager mode to finalize the
transaction.
24. ZERO SALE MGR Y or N Select Y if you wish to control zero transactions (when cash
ONLY is removed from the drawer). When selected mode position
must be in the Manager mode to finalize the transaction.
25. MODIFIER: POP-UP A MODIFIER key alters the next PLU registered, either by
ITEM changing the code number of the PLU so that a different
POP-UP item is registered, or by adding the modifier descriptor and
SALE not changing the code of the subsequent PLU. If you press
STAY a modifier key, you have the option of the modifier applying
DOWN only to the next item (0), having the same modifier apply to
any subsequent item registered in the same transaction (1),
or having the same modifier apply to any subsequent item
on any subsequent transaction (2).
26. PRICE LEVEL IS POP-UP If you press a price level key, you have the option of the
ITEM level key applying only to the next item (0), having the
POP-UP same level key apply to any subsequent item registered in
SALE the same transaction (1), or having the same level key apply
STAY to any subsequent item on any subsequent transaction (2).
DOWN
27. KEYBOARD POP-UP If you press a keyboard shift key, you have the option of the
SHIFT ITEM keyboard level key applying only to the next item (0),
POP-UP having the same level key apply to any subsequent item
SALE registered in the same transaction (1), or having the same
STAY level key apply to any subsequent item on any subsequent
DOWN transaction (2).

152 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


System Option Entry Description
28. HASH IS NORMAL NORMAL: Hash adds to all totals except the gross and net
NON-ADD sales totals on the financial report.
NON-ADD: Hash does not add to any totals, except the
HASH total on the financial report.
29. % IS NOT AFFECT Y or N Select Y not to affect net sale amount.
TO NET SALE
30. TENDER VALID AMT OF Validation is allowed if an appropriate optional printer is
AMOUNT SALE connected to an RS-232C port. Here you can choose the
AMT content of single line validation
TENDERED
31. DISABLE CASH Y or N Select Y to block the cash declaration function.
DECLARATION
32. ALLOW SALE Y or N When N, inventory PLU’s cannot be sold when stock
WITH ZERO reaches "0".
STOCK
33. WARNING BELOW Y or N Select Y to display warning message if current stock value
MINIMUM STOCK is less than minimum stock value.
34. STOCK PROGRAM ADD(+) Choose ADD(+), SUB(-) or REPLACE to determine
BY PC/SD/USB SUB(-) whether the quantity of inventory you enter in the PLU
REPLACE stock program adds to existing inventory quantity, or
whether it replaces the current inventory quantity.
35. USE X/Z/P/S- Y or N Select Y to be password protected to provide management
MODE PASSWORD restriction in X, Z, PROGRAM(P) and SERVICE(S)
MODE.
36. PRINTER PAPER Y or N A built-in paper sensor determines whether paper is
SENSOR ACTIVE currently loaded in the printer. If Y, operations are not
allowed without paper loaded. If N, operations are allowed
when paper is out.
37. RS-232C PORT Y or N Select Y to turn ON the RS-232C port power.
POWER ON
38. DISPLAY 4 LINE Y or N Select Y to display 4 items or N to display 1 item in
IN REG MODE Register mode. (Graphic Multi-line LCD only)
39. STORE NAME 8 Character Stored files will be saved on SD/USB under a folder with
the store name. Do not include spaces between the name.
40. DRAWER LIMIT 8 DIGITS You can set a limit for the drawer total. When cash in
drawer exceeds the limit you program here, a warning will
display on the screen. You must press CLEAR to remove
the warning and continue operations. The warning will
continue to appear at the completion of every transaction
with the limit exceeded, until you use the PAID OUT
function to remove cash from the drawer.
Set the drawer limit to 0 to disable the drawer limit
warning.
41. CHECK CHANGE 8 DIGITS Use this program to set the maximum amount of cash that
LIMIT can be returned when a check is tendered for an amount
greater than the amount of the sale. For example, if the
check change limit is $10.00 the maximum amount that can
be tendered into the check key on a $5.00 sale is $15.00.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 153


System Option Entry Description
42. TARE WEIGHT 4 DIGITS A tare is the amount of weight representing the container, or
TARE 1 : package when items are sold by weight. You can pre-
TARE 2 : program five tare weights, representing the weight of
different containers. When you place an item and a
TARE 3 :
container on an optional scale, you can enter the tare
TARE 4 : number to automatically subtract the pre-programmed tare
TARE 5 : weight. If you choose to use tare #5 for manual tare weight
entry, do not enter a weight for tare #5.
43. MACHINE NO. 5 DIGITS The machine number is printed on the register receipt.
Program a machine number so that any receipt can be
identified with the store or register where the transaction
took place.
44. MODE P/W: 6 DIGITS If you wish to use mode password, you must program a
X Mode P/W password that you will use to enter X mode, Z-Mode,
Z Mode P/W PROGRAM(P) mode and SERVICE(S) mode. The
password may be up to 6 digits.
PGM Mode P/W
S Mode P/W
45. LANGUAGE ENGLISH Descriptors of menu, system and option can be converted to
SELECT SPANISH the selected language automatically.
GERMAN But Descriptors of Report, PLU, Group and etc. cannot be
converted to the selected language.
Those descriptors can be changed only by user
programming.
46. USE RECEIPT AS Y or N Select Y if you wish to print sale receipt as detail printer
DEATIL format (journal printer). If Y, you can program some options
of DETAIL PRINT option.
Additional parts are required for the optional Take-Up
Spool. Contact your sales representative for details.
47. NOT INCREASE Y or N Select Y if you do not wish to increase a receipt number
RCPT# AT CLK when signing on or off a clerk.
IN/OUT
48. EFT DRAFT DATATRAN Select Fine Dining to print a tip line on EFT draft. Select
FINE Datatran to not print tip line.
DINNING
49. MSR CONNECT DATATRAN Select if the card reader is connected to the Datatran or the
PDC PDC.
50. PIN PAD TYPE DUKPT Always select DUKPT
ROTATE
51. PIN PAD PORT 0-3 Select the port number where Pin-Pad is connected.
52. COPY OF 0-99 Set the desired number of EFT receipts to print (default = 1)
DATATRAN
RECEIPT
53. MARK CARD No Y or N
Set to N to NOT print card number on EFT receipts.
ON ALL EFT
DRAFT
54. “test” CLERK ID? Y or N Always set to N

154 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


System Option Entry Description
55. CARDHOLDER Y or N Set to Y if you want the cardholder’s name printed on EFT
NAME?
receipts.
56. DISABLE EFT Y or N If Y the amount confirmation on the Pin-Pad is disabled.
AMNT (Requires v4.031 or later.)
CONFIRMATION

PRINT Options
Print Option Entry Description
1. PRINT DATE Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the date.
2. PRINT TIME Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the time.
3. PRINT MACHINE NO. Y or N If you are using more than one cash register, you can
identify the specific register where a receipt was printed.
Enter Y if you wish to print the register number on the
receipt.
4. PRINT CLERK NAME Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the clerk
name on the receipt.
5. PRINT CONSECUTIVE Y or N The consecutive number (also referred to as the
NO. transaction counter, or receipt counter) normally prints on
each receipt. Select N if you do not wish to print this
counter.
6. PRINT SALE ITEM No Y or N Select Y if you wish to print a count of the number of
items on each receipt.
7. PRINT PLU # ON Y or N If Y, the PLU number and descriptor will print. If N, only
RECEIPT the PLU number will print.
8. USE THOUSAND Y or N Select Y if you wish to use Thousandths Separator.
SEPARATOR
9. SEPARATOR TYPE , Choose the thousandths separator: Comma (,) (space) or
SPACE decimal (.)
.
10. PRINT RECEIPT WHEN Y or N Select N if you do not wish to print a receipt when signing
SIGN ON/OFF on or off a clerk.
11. ALLOW SECOND Y or N Set to Y if you wish to issue only one copy of a
RECEIPT transaction receipt.
12. PRINT SUBTOTAL Y or N Select Y if you wish the subtotal to print when the
WHEN PRESSED SUBTOTAL key is pressed.
13. PRINT SUBTOTAL Y or N If you hand-write credit card slips, you may find it useful
WITHOUT TAX to print the merchandise subtotal. Select Y if you wish to
print the subtotal without tax on the receipt.
14. PRT GROUP TOTAL Y or N Choose Y if you wish to print group total after tender.
AFTER TENDER
15. VOLUME UNIT GAL If gallonage is selected in PLU programming, choose
LTR gallons or liters here.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 155


Print Option Entry Description
16. SURPRESS BITMAP IN Y or N Select Y if you do not wish to print Image logo in
PGM/X/Z Program, X and Z-Modes.
17. PRE-FEED LINE# 0-5 Enter the number of lines you wish to feed before
RECEIPT (0-5) beginning receipt printer print.
18. POST-FEED LINE# 0-5 Enter the number of lines you wish to feed after beginning
RECEIPT (0-5) receipt printer print.
19. PRT DOUBLE HIGH Y or N Select Y if you wish to print total amount as double size
ALL TOTAL AMT on the receipt.
20. CURRENCY LOGO: 5 Character Users can designate a different home currency symbol.
HOME CURRENCY To select a different home currency symbol, press the
CONV#1 LOGO symbol you wish to use on the Alpha Keyboard Overlay.
CONV#2 LOGO If you are using the currency conversion feature, you can
CONV#3 LOGO select the appropriate symbol for each foreign currency
CONV#4 LOGO you are accepting. To select a different symbol, press the
symbol you wish to use on the Alpha Keyboard Overlay.
21. SCAN PLU NAME & Y or N Select Y if you wish to scan only PLU name and price.
PRICE
22. BOLD DESC. FOR Y or N Select Y if you wish to print total descriptor and payment
TOTAL/PAYMENT (CASH, CHECK, and MISC TEND) descriptor as double
size on the receipt.
23. PRINT QUANTITY ON Y or N Select Y if you wish to print quantity of each item on the
RECEIPT receipt.
24. USE TAXABLE Y or N Select Y if you wish to use taxable descriptor of financial
DESC.OF FIN ON RCPT on the receipt.

REPORT Options
Report Option Entry Description
1. CASH DECLARATION Y or N Select Y to enforce a cash declaration function before a
REQ BEFORE REPORTS financial, clerk, or cash in drawer report can be
generated.
2. ONLY ONE X RPT BEF. Y or N Select Y to allow X report only one time before Cash
CASH DECLA Declaration.
3. DISABLE X REPORT Y or N Select Y to disable X reports.
4. OPEN DRAWER WHEN Y or N Select N to stop the drawer from opening when reports
REPORTS RUN are run.
5. SURPRESS PRT OF Y or N Select Y if you do not want to print last issued date on
LAST REPT DATE report.
6. RESET RECEIPT No Y or N Select Y if you wish to reset the transaction number
AFTER Z REPORT (often called the receipt counter) to zero after the
financial report is reset.
7. RESET GRAND TOTAL Y or N Select Y if you wish to reset the grand total to zero after
AFTER Z REPORT the financial report is reset.

156 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Report Option Entry Description
8. RESET Z COUNTER Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
AFTER Z1 FINANCIAL counter after a Z1 financial report.
REPORT
9. RESET Z COUNTER Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
AFTER Z1 TIME counter after a Z1 time report.
REPORT
10. RESET Z COUNTER Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
AFTER Z1 PLU REPORT counter after a Z1 PLU report.
11. RESET Z COUNTER Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
AFTER Z1 CLERK counter after a Z1 clerk report.
REPORT
12. RESET Z COUNTER Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
AFTER Z1 GROUP counter after a Z1 group report.
REPORT
13. RESET Z COUNTER Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the Z
AFTER Z2 DAILY RPT counter after a Z2 of the daily sales report.
14. RESET ORDER No. Y or N Choose Y or N to determine if you wish to reset the
AFTER Z1 REPORT Order number after a Z1 of the financial report.
15. PRINT Z COUNTER ON Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the reset
REPORT counter on Z reports.
16. SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON Y or N By default, the register prints only totals with
FINANCIAL REPORT information other than zero. Select N, if you wish to
print the contents of all the financial report totals, even
if the total is zero.
17. PRINT NEGATIVE ITEM Y or N Select N to remove the VOID MODE, RETURN,
ON REPORT ERROR CORR and VOID totals from the financial and
clerk reports.
18. PRINT AUDACTION ON Y or N Select N to remove the AUDACTION total from the
FINANCIAL REPORT financial and clerk reports.
19. PRINT ON FIN RPT Y or N Select Y to print the average items per customer (PLU
AVG ITEM/CUST sales counter/Net sales counter).
20. PRINT ON FIN RPT Y or N Select Y to print the average sales per customer (Net
AVG $/CUST Sales/Net Sales counter).
21. PRINT CLERK REPORT Y or N Select Y if you wish to include the clerk report
AFTER FINANCIAL information at the end of the financial report.
REPORT
22. PRINT DOUBLE Y or N Select Y if you wish to print 2 copy financial reports.
FINANCIAL REPORT
23. PRINT GROSS TOTAL Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross
ON X REPORT sales total on the X financial report.
24. PRINT GROSS TOTAL Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the gross
ON Z REPORT sales total on the Z financial report.
25. PRINT GRAND TOTAL Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand
ON X REPORT total on the X financial report.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 157


Report Option Entry Description
26. PRINT GRAND TOTAL Y or N Select N if you wish to delete the printing of the grand
ON Z REPORT total on the Z financial report.
27. GRAND TOTAL IS GROSS Choose GROSS if you wish the grand total to
NET accumulate daily gross sales totals. Choose NET if you
wish the grand total to accumulate daily net sales totals.
28. SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON Y or N By default, the register prints only totals with
CLERK REPORT information other than zero. Select N, if you wish to
print the contents of all the clerk report totals, even if the
total is zero.
29. PRINT MEDIA TOTALS Y or N Select Y to print media totals for each clerk, thus
ON CLERK REPORT allowing clerk cash drawer accountability.
30. SKIP ZERO TOTALS ON Y or N By default, the register prints only totals with
PLU REPORT information other than zero. Select Y, if you wish to
print the contents of all the PLU’s, even if the total is
zero.
31. PRINT PLU # Y or N Determines whether PLU# is displayed on the report.
ON PLU REPORT
32. PRINT % OF SALES ON Y or N The register can calculate the percentage of sales
PLU REPORT represented by each PLU. Select Y if you wish to print
this percentage on the PLU report. Note: the percentage
will print only on standalone register reports, not IRC
report.
33. PRT PLU BY PRICE Y or N Select Y if you wish to print PLU by price level on PLU
LEVEL REPORT reports.
34. ALLOW Z STOCK Y or N When N, the operator is not allowed to clear (Z) stock.
REPORT
35. PRINT WHEN POLLING Y or N Choose N if you would like to suppress register printing
REPORTS when reports are polled.
36. PRINT TRAIN TOTAL Y or N Select Y if you wish to print train total on Financial
IN FINANCIAL REPORT Report.
37. PRINT VAT Y or N If Y, a breakdown of the VAT eligible sale (the net
BREAKDOWN ON amount) will print on Financial Report.
FINANCIAL REPORT
38. PRINT VAT Y or N If Y, a breakdown of the VAT eligible sale (the net
BREAKDOWN ON amount) will print on Clerk Report.
CLERK REPORT
39. PRINT GROUP ON Y or N Select Y if you wish to print the group report on
FINANCIAL REPORT financial report. If Y, the group report will not be issued
alone.

158 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


TAX Options
Tax Option Entry Description
1. PRINT TAX SYMBOL Y or N Select N to remove the tax symbol (i.e."T1") from the
print and display.
2. PRINT TAX AMOUNT Y or N Select Y if you wish to delete the printing of the tax
amount on the receipt.
3. PRINT TAXABLE Y or N Select Y if you wish to print the total of merchandise
TOTAL eligible for each tax on the receipt.
4. PRINT TAX RATE Y or N If you are calculating a tax percentage (add-on or VAT),
select Y if you wish to print the tax rate on each receipt.
5. PRINT VAT Y or N If Y, a breakdown of the VAT eligible sale will print, the
BREAKDOWN net amount and the VAT amount.
6. TAX AMOUNT IS ITEM Select COMBINE if you are calculating and reporting
COMBINE more than one sales tax rate separately and you wish to
print just the total of multiple taxes rather than itemize
each tax on the receipt.

CURRENCY Options
Currency Option Entry Description
1. BASE CURRENCY HOME Choose base currency Home or Euro.
EURO

ROUNDING Options
Rounding Option Entry Description
1. ROUND TABLE ROUND TABLE Select ROUND TABLE, SWEDISH or CANADIAN to
TYPE SWEDISH implement the rounding system that you enter on this
CANADIAN option.
2. ROUND TABLE 2 DIGITS If you wish to use Round Table system, you must
program a Rounding table.
The SWEDISH/CANADIAN rounding table is as
below.
# START END VALUE
1 .00 .02 .00
2 .03 .07 .05
3 .08 .09 .10
3. ALLOW Y or N Select Y you wish to allow rounding when the
ROUND ON SUBTOTAL key is pressed.
SUBT
4. ALLOW Y or N Select Y you wish to allow rounding when press CASH
ROUND ON key.
CASH

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 159


Rounding Option Entry Description
5. % AND TAX ROUND UP 0.005, Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
ROUNDING ROUND UP, method for tax and discount calculations.
ROUND DOWN
6. SPLIT PRICE ROUND UP 0.005, Select the digit that represents the appropriate rounding
ROUNDING ROUND UP, method for split pricing (i.e. 2 at 3 for $1.00)
ROUND DOWN calculations.

LOGO Options
Logo Option Entry Description
1. PRINT PREAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the receipt.
MESSAGE IN RCPT
2. PRINT POSTAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the
MESSAGE IN RCPT receipt.
3. PRINT PREAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the guest
MESSAGE IN GUEST check.
4. PRINT POSTAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the POSTAMBLE on the guest
MESSAGE IN GUEST check.
5. PRINT PREAMBLE IMG Y or N Choose whether to print the PRE-GRAPHIC LOGO on
IN RCPT the receipt.
6. PRINT POSTAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the POST-GRAPHIC LOGO on
IMG IN RCPT the receipt.
7. PRINT PREAMBLE IMG Y or N Choose whether to print the PRE-GRAPHIC LOGO on
IN GUEST the guest check.
8. PRINT POSTAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the POST-GRAPHIC LOGO on
IMG IN GUEST the guest check.
9. PREAMBLE IMAGE 0-20 Choose pre- image no to print on the receipt.
NO. ON RCPT
10. POSTAMBLE IMAGE 0-20 Choose post-image no to print on the receipt.
NO. ON RCPT
11. PREAMBLE IMAGE 0-20 Choose pre- image no to print on the guest check.
NO. ON GUEST
12. POSTAMBLE IMAGE 0-20 Choose post-image no to print on the guest check.
NO. ON GUEST
13. PRINT PRE MESSAGE Y or N Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE on the internal
ON ORDER IN RCPT order receipt.
14. PRINT PRE IMG ON Y or N Choose whether to print the PREAMBLE LOGO on the
ORDER IN RCPT internal order receipt.

160 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


KITCHEN PRINTER Options
Kitchen Printer Option Entry Description
15. PRINT KP ORDER # ON Y or N A system wide counter creates an order number for each
RECEIPT kitchen requisition. Choose Y or N to print the order
number on the kitchen printer requisition.
16. PRINT PRICE ON KP Y or N You can choose to print the item with or without its'
price on the kitchen requisition.
17. SEND TO KP IN Y or N You can choose whether to print or not print
VOID MODE registrations in void mode on kitchen requisitions.
18. SEND ORDER TO KP Y or N Choose Y to print orders on the KP when the
AT SUBTOTAL SUBTOTAL key is pressed. Choose N to print orders
on the KP when the order is finalized.
19. COMBINE LIKE ITEMS Y or N If two of the same items are registered in the same
ON KP transaction, you can choose the format on the kitchen
requisition. For example, if Y, "2 HAMBURGERS; if
N, "1 HAMBURGER" and "1 HAMBURGER".
20. PRIORITY PRINT BY Y or N If Y, the order in which items appear on a kitchen
GROUP ON KP requisition is determined by the group to which the item
is assigned, i.e. items reported to group 1 will print
before items reported to group 2.
21. PRT GROUP DETAIL ON Y or N Select Y to print Group detail on the order receipt.
KP
22. TWO LINE PRINT ON Y or N Choose Y to print two lines on Kitchen printer.
KP
23. PRINT PLU NUMBER Y or N Select Y to print PLU number on the order receipt.
ON KP
24. PRINT TOTAL AMT OF Y or N Select Y to print total amount of PLU on kitchen printer.
PLU ON KP
25. KP START NO. 6 DIGITS If you wish to modify, the KP start number can be
programed up to 6 digits.

BARCODE Options
Barcode Option Entry Description
1. BARCODE TYPE NONE Select bar code type.
PRICE
WEIGHT
2. LENGTH OF FIELD1 4-6 Select length of PLU code.
PLU CODE
3. LENGTH OF PRICE OR 4-6 Select length of price or weight.
WEIGHT
4. DECIMAL NUM. FOR 0-3 Select number of decimal positions for the weight.
WEIGHT
5. BAR WEIGHT TYPE LB Choose weight type.
KG
OZ

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 161


EJ Options
EJ Option Entry Description
1. ELECTRONIC Y or N Select Y to enable the electronic journal. The
JOURNAL ENABLE electronic journal captures in memory what you
would print line by line on a traditional journal.
The four options that follow control the
electronic journal feature. The electronic journal
can be printed in the REPORT MODE reset in
the Z-MODE.
2. PROMPT WHEN E.J. Y or N If the electronic journal is enabled above, select
BUFFER IS FULL Y if you wish to display a message to notify the
operator when the journal memory is full.
3. STOP OPERATIONS Y or N If the electronic journal is enabled above, select
WHEN E.J. BUFFER IS Y if you wish to stop operations when the
FULL journal memory is full.
4. SEND ONLY NEGATIVE Y or N If the electronic journal is enabled above, select
ENTRIES TO E.J. Y if you wish to capture only transactions with
negative entries.
5. SEND RESET REPORT Y or N If the electronic journal is enabled above, select
TO E.J. Y if you wish to capture reset reports.
6. E.J. PRINTING NEW NEW: Prints electronic journal from lowest
7. OLD consecutive number to highest.
OLD: Prints electronic journal from highest
consecutive number to lowest.
8. E.J. PORT 0-2 Choose a port for a remote printer to print
electronic journal reports instead of the register
printer.
9. PRINT SMALL FONT EJ Y or N Select Y to print small font on EJ report.
REPORT
10. SAVE EJ TO SD NONE Store electronic journal data to the SD card.
EVERY TIME Select “EVERY TIME” to store at every sale.
ONCE AFTER Z Select “Once after z report” to store only after z
REPORT report.
If you don’t want to store electronic journal data
to the SD card, select “NONE”.

TRAIN MODE Options


Train Mode Option Entry Description
1. OPEN DRAWER IN Y or N Select N if you do not want the cash drawer to open
TRAIN MODE during training mode operations.
2. PRINT TRAIN MODE Y or N When in training mode, the message "TRAIN MODE"
TITLE normally prints on each receipt. Select N if you wish to
delete this message.
3. SEND TO KP IN Y or N You can choose whether to print or not print
4. TRAIN MODE registrations in training mode on kitchen requisitions.

162 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Train Mode Option Entry Description
5. PRINT JOURNAL IN Y or N Select Y to print on the detail printer in train mode.
TRAIN MODE
6. TRAIN P/W 6 DIGITS If you wish to use training mode, you must program a
password that you will use to enter training mode. The
password may be up to 6 digits.
7. PRT TRAIN CLERK Y or N Select N if you do not wish to print a message of train
START/END MESSAGE clerk start or end.

TABLE Options
Table Option Entry Description
1. REQ X MODE TO Y or N Select Y, if you wish to open new checks or to close
OPEN/CLOSE CHECK checks only in X mode.
2. CONSOLIDATION ON Y or N Consolidation of like items can be selected for soft guest
CHECK TRACK check printing. For example, if three rounds of drinks
are served, the check will print "3 TAP BEER" rather
than "1 TAP BEER" three times.
3. PRINT VOID AND Y or N Select Y to print Void and Return on Check.
RETURN ON CHECK
BILL
4. PRINT GUEST CHECK Y or N Select Y to print guest check at finalized.
AT FINALIZED
5. PRINT DATE ON Y or N Select Y to print date on service receipt.
SERV(HARD CHK)
6. SUPRESS NEW Y or N Select Y to print new balance receipt.
BALANCE RECEIPT
7. PRINT TABLE SERVICE Y or N Select Y to print table service in financial report.
IN REPORT
8. COMPULSORY EAT-IN, Y or N Choose Y if you wish to enforce use of one of the
TAKE OUT, DRIVE destination keys (EAT-IN, TAKE OUT, or DRIVE
THRU BEFORE THRU) before the sale is finalized.
TENDER

DETAIL PRINT Options


An optional Take-Up Spool is available which requires additional parts.
Contact your sales representative for details.
Detail Option Entry Description
1. JOURNAL IS OFF Y or N Select Y to disable Detail printer.
2. CONDENSE JOURNAL Y or N Select Y to print small font on detail printer.
PRINT
3. NOT PRINT MSG ON Y or N Select Y if you do not wish to print message on detail
JOURNAL receipt.
4. SPOOL USE Y or N Select N to disable spool.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 163


Detail Option Entry Description
5. PRINT PREAMBLE IMG Y or N Choose whether to print the PRE-GRAPHIC LOGO on
ON JOURNAL detail receipt.
6. PRINT POSTAMBLE Y or N Choose whether to print the POST-GRAPHIC LOGO on
IMG ON JOURNAL detail receipt.

164 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Employee Programming
1. At the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 5 and CASH for EMPLOYEE. The CLERK
NUMBER screen displays:
E M P LO Y EE
E N T ER CLE R K #
( 1 - 10 ) 0

2. Press the clerk number and CASH.


3. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key. Select the Employee option you wish to
program.
4. Press the ↑ key for YES and the ↓ key for NO. Press the CASH to confirm the option value
and return previous screen.
5. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the ENTER CLERK# screen.

Clerk Programming - Reference Information


Option Entry Description
1. NAME Alphanumeric You can program a descriptor for each clerk. The name you
16 character program will print on the receipt in place of the default CLERK
#1-99. Type the descriptor using the descriptor code method (see
page 115) or use the Alpha Keyboard Overlay. The overlay is
automatically activated when the cursor is pointing at the DESC
field.
2. PASSWORD 6-digit If you are using a direct or code entry clerk system. The number
number you set here is the number you must use to sign on or clock in/out.
If using an optional card reader, you must swipe the employee card
at this field.
3. TRAIN Y or N Set to Y if you wish to be train clerk.
CLERK
4. ALLOW X Y or N If Y, you can use X Reports menu.
REPORTS
5. ALLOW Z Y or N If Y, you can use Z-Mode.
MODE
6. ALLOW P Y or N If Y, you can use P mode.
MODE
7. ALLOW S Y or N If Y, you can use S-Mode.
MODE
8. ALLOW Y or N If Y, you can use VOID mode.
VOID MODE

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 165


Time
Time & Date
Use this program to set the clock and calendar on your NR-500 Series. The date changes
automatically. After initial setting, time changing will probably be required only for beginning and
ending daylight savings time.
1. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 6 and CASH for TIME. Press 1 and CASH for
TIME & DATE. The TIME & DATE screen displays:
T I M E & DA T E

TIME : H H : MM
( 2 4 :0 0 ) 1 6 : 42

2. Type the current time in 24-hour format (i.e. military time, where 13:00 is 1:00 PM.) Press
the CASH.
3. Type the current date in MM (month) DD (day) and YY (year) format. Press the CASH.

Time Schedule
Certain functions can be set to automatically initiate at a specified time and date. When the time
setting ends, the register will revert to the default. Time schedule functions include:
• Price Level 2: To accommodate ‘Happy Hour’ pricing for example.
• Keyboard Shift 1-3: You may have different keyboards for ‘Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner’.
• Program Backup to SD: To automatically back up the program files at the specified time &
date. This is useful when program changes are made frequently.
• Report Backup to SD: To automatically back up the X Report data at the specified time &
date. This report information can then be loaded into the eSpresso PC Utility for easy
viewing.
Each time schedule function has the same programming options; To schedule these functions:
1. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 6 and CASH for TIME. Press 2 and CASH for
TIME SCHEDULE. The TIME SCHEDULE screen displays:
T I M E S CHE D U LE
1 . P RI C E L E V EL 2 
2 . K BD SHI F T 1
3 . K BD SHI F T 2
4 . K BD SHI F T 3
5 . S D P GM B A CK U P
6 . S D R EP B A CK U P
- P A GE 1/1 -

166 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


2. Select a time schedule function from the menu to program. For example, if you press 1 and
CASH for PRICE LEVEL2. Time schedule program screen displays:
P R I CE LEV E L 2 P R I CE LEV E L 2
1 . S TA R T T I M E [ 9 9: 9 9] 7 . T HU [ N]
2 . E ND TIM E [ 9 9. 9 9] 8 . F RI [ N]
3 . S UN [ N] 9 . S AT [ N]
4 . M ON [ N] 1 0 . EV E RY D A Y [ N]
5 . T UE [ N]
6 . W ED [ N]
- P A GE 1/1 - - P A GE 2/2 -

3. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. You can
also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.
4. From the YES/NO type option screen, Press the ↑ key for YES and the ↓ key for NO. Press
the CASH to confirm the option value.
5. To exit the current Time Schedule program, press the CLEAR key.
6. Continue programming additional Time Schedules as desired, press CLEAR to return to the
Program Mode.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 167


Taxes Programming
The NR-500 Series allows three calculation options for each of the four possible taxes.
• Add-On - most sales taxes can be programmed by entering an add-on tax percentage rate.
• VAT - if tax is included in the cost of the item, you can use value added tax (VAT) to
calculate the tax share of each sale.
• GST - for the Canadian Goods and Services tax (GST) can be set using tax rate 4.
Important Note: After you have entered your tax program, test for accuracy by entering
several transactions of different dollar amounts. Carefully check to make sure the tax charged
by the cash register matches the tax amounts on the printed tax chart for your area. As a
merchant, you are responsible for accurate tax collection. If the cash register is not calculating
tax accurately, or if you cannot program your tax properly from the information in this manual,
contact your Dealer for assistance.

Programming an Add-On Tax Rate Percentage


When tax requirements can be met using a straight percentage rate, use the following method to
program a tax as a straight percentage.
1. Move to the PROGRAM MODE.
2. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 7 and CASH to view the TAXES screen:
T A X ES
E N T ER TAX #
( 1 - 4) 0

3. Enter the Tax number and press the CASH key to confirm.
T A X ES
1 . D ES C : [T A X 1]
2 . T YP E [ ADD - O N]
3 . R AT E [0. 0 0 0]

4. At the TYPE field, press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select the ADD-ON and press the
CASH key to confirm.
5. At the RATE field, input the tax rate and press the CASH key to confirm.
6. Enter the percentage rate for the sales tax. For example, if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6000.
Press CASH to set the rate.
7. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM MODE
screen.

168 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Programming a VAT Tax (Value Added Tax)
1. When a tax is included in the cost of the item, you can use the value added tax (VAT)
program to calculate the tax share of each sale.
2. Move to the PROGRAM MODE.
3. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 7 and CASH to view the TAXES screen:
T A X ES
E N T ER TAX #
( 1 - 4) 0

4. Enter the Tax number and press the CASH key to confirm.
T A X ES
1 . D ES C : [T A X 2]
2 . T YP E [ V A T]
3 . R AT E [0. 0 0 0]

5. At the TYPE field, press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select VAT and press the CASH key to
confirm.
6. At the RATE field, input the tax rate and press the CASH key to confirm.
7. Enter the percentage rate for the sales tax. For example, if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6000.
Press CASH to set the rate.
8. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM MODE
screen.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 169


Programming Canadian GST
1. Tax 4 can be programmed to accommodate the Canadian Goods and Services tax (GST).
2. Move to the PROGRAM MODE.
3. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 7 and CASH to view the TAXES screen:
T A X ES
E N T ER TAX #
( 1 - 4) 4

4. Enter the Tax number and press the CASH key to confirm.
T A X ES
1 . D ES C : [TA X 4 ] 
2 . T YP E [ A DD- O N ]
3 . R AT E [ 0.0 0 0 ]
4 . G ST IS B Y T A X R A T E1 [N]
5 . G ST IS B Y T A X R A T E2 [N]
6 . G ST IS B Y T A X R A T E3 [N]
- P A GE 1/1 -

5. At the TYPE field, press the ↑ key and the ↓ key and press the CASH key to confirm.
6. At the RATE field, input the GST rate and press the CASH key to confirm.
7. Enter the percentage rate for the sales tax. For example, if the tax is 6 percent, enter 6000.
Press CASH to set the rate.
8. At the GST IS BY TAX1 field, if the GST is taxable by rate1 (tax on tax) by pressing the ↑
key and the ↓ key, the pressing the CASH key
9. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM MODE
screen.

170 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Programming a Tax Table
In some cases, a tax that is entered as a percentage does not exactly follow the tax charts that apply in
your area (even if the tax chart is based on a percentage). In these cases, we recommend that you
enter your tax using tax table programming. This method will match tax collection exactly to the
break points of your tax table.
Before programming, obtain a copy of the tax table you wish to program. You will need the printed
tax table if you wish to determine the break point entries yourself. The "Tax Table Programming
Chart Example: 6% Tax Table" shown below is used as an example in the steps that follow.
Note: You can enter up to 60 break points.

Determining Break Point Entries


1. Examine the printed tax table for the tax you are programming.
2. Refer to the “Tax Table Programming Chart Example: 6% Tax Table” to help with this
exercise.
3. Calculate the break point differences by subtracting the high side of the previous range from
the high side of the dollar range.
4. Examine the pattern of break point differences to determine when the break points begin to
repeat. Mark the beginning break points that do not fit a pattern as “non-repeat breaks.”
Mark the break points that are repeating in a pattern as “repeat breaks.”

Tax Table Programming Chart Example: 6% Tax Table


Break point
Tax Charged Sale Dollar Range Differences
$0.00 $0.00 - $0.10
$0.01 $0.11 - $0.21 11
$0.02 $0.22 - $0.38 17
$0.03 $0.39 - $0.56 18 Non-Repeat
$0.04 $0.57 - $0.73 17
$0.05 $0.74 - $0.91 18
$0.06 $0.92 - $1.08 17
$0.07 $1.09 - $1.24 16 Repeat
$0.08 $1.25 - $1.41 17
$0.09 $1.42 - $1.58 17
$0.10 $1.59 - $1.74 16
$0.11 $1.75 - $1.91 17
$0.12 $1.92 - $2.08 17
$0.13 $2.09 - $2.24 16
$0.14 $2.25 - $2.41 17
To enter the example 6% tax table in tax 1:

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 171


Programming a Tax Table
1. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 7 and CASH to view the TAXES screen:
T A X ES
E N T ER TAX #
( 1 - 4) 0

2. Enter the Tax number and press the CASH key to confirm.
T A X ES
1 . D ES C : [TA X 1 ]
2 . T YP E [ T AX - TAB L E ]
3 . R AT E [ 0.0 0 0 ]

3. At the TYPE field, press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select the TAX-TABLE and press the CASH
key to confirm.
4. Press CASH to view the ‘NON-TAX AMOUNT’ entry field:
T A X T A BLE 3
N O N TA X AM T 0.10

5. Enter maximum non-taxable amount then Press CASH; The ‘1ST TAX AMOUNT’ field displays:
T A X T A BLE 3
N O N TA X AM T 0.10
1 S T T A X AM 0.01

6. Enter the amount of the first tax that will be charged (typically 1¢) then Press CASH; The ‘NON-
REPEAT BREAK’ entry filed displays:
T A X T A BLE 3
N O N TA X AM T 0 . 10
1 S T T A X AM 0 . 01
N O N -R E PEA T BR E AK
[1] 0 . 00

7. Enter the first Non-Repeat Break and press CASH.


8. Continue entering all the Non-Repeat Breaks, when you have entered the last Non-Repeat Break
press CASH; at the next field don’t enter a value, just press CASH. The ‘REPEAT BREAK’
entry field displays:
T A X T A BLE 3
N O N TA X AM T 0 . 10
1 S T T A X AM 0 . 01
N O N -R E PEA T BR E AK
[3]
R E P EA T BR E A K 1 . 41

9. Enter the first Repeat Break and press CASH;


10. Continue entering all the Repeat Breaks, when you have entered the last Repeat Break press
CASH; at the next field don’t enter a value, just press CASH.
11. Continue to program additional taxes or press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM MODE
screen.

172 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Messages
From the PROGRAM MODE, press 8 and the CASH key for MESSAGES. The MESSAGES
screen displays:
M E S SA G ES
1 . P RE A MBL E 
2 . P OS T AMB L E
3 . E ND O RSE M E NT
4 . F IN A NCI A L R P T
5 . C LE R K R P T
6 . D AT A TRA N
- P A GE 1/1 -

Preamble
The preamble is a programming message of up to six lines that appears at the top of each receipt
and/or guest check.
1. From the MESSAGES screen, press 1 and CASH to display the PREAMBLE screen:
P R E AM B LE
1 . T HA N K-Y O U
2 . C AL L AG A I N
3 . N O D ATA 
4 . N O D ATA
5 . N O D ATA
6 . N O D ATA
- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
Preamble line you wish to program.
3. Continue to program additional Preamble or press CLEAR to return to the PROGRAM
MODE screen.

Postamble
The postamble is a programming message of up to six lines that appears at the bottom of each receipt
and/or guest check.
1. From the MESSAGES screen, press 2 and CASH to display the POSTAMBLE screen:
P O S TA M BLE
1.NO D ATA 
2.NO D ATA
3.NO D ATA
4.NO D ATA
5.NO D ATA
6.NO D ATA
- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
Postamble line you wish to program.
3. Continue to program additional Postamble or press CLEAR.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 173


Endorsement
The Endorsement Message is a programming message of up to ten lines that prints when a check is
endorsed on an optional slip printer.
1. From the MESSAGES screen, press 3 and CASH to display the ENDORSEMENT screen:
E N D OR S EME N T E N D OR S EME N T
1.NO D ATA  7 . N O D ATA 
2.NO D ATA 8 . N O D ATA
3.NO D ATA 9 . N O D ATA
4.NO D ATA 1 0 . NO DAT A
5.NO D ATA
6.NO D ATA
- P A GE 1/2 - - P A GE 2/2 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
Endorsement line you wish to program.
3. Type in the desired endorsement message for the selected line; Press CASH to accept the
entry and continue to the next line.
4. Continue to program additional Endorsement Lines or press CLEAR to return to the
PROGRAM MODE screen.

Financial Report
The Financial Report selection allows you to reprogram the descriptors that appear with the Financial
Report totals and counters. For example, the first total on the financial report "+PLU TTL" represents
the total of all positive PLU entries. You might want to re-label this total to say "ADJST TTL". You
can reprogram any of the Financial Report totals listed here with any 24-character descriptor.
1. From the MESSAGES screen, press 4 and CASH to display the FINANCIAL REP MESG.
screen:
F I N AN C IAL R PT
1 . + PL U TT L
2 . - PL U TT L
3 . A DJ S T T T L
4 . N ON T AX
5 . T AX 1 SA L E S
6 . T AX 2 SA L E S
- P A GE 1/1 6 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select line and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
Financial Report line you wish to program.
3. After you have completed typing the descriptor, press CASH to accept the new message.
4. Continue to program additional Report message or press CLEAR to return to the
PROGRAM MODE screen.

174 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Default Financial Report Messages
NO DESCRIPTION NO DESCRIPTION NO DESCRIPTION
1. +PLU TTL 32. CANCEL 63. CHG8 SALES
2. -PLU TTL 33. GROSS SALE 64. FOREIGN 1
3. ADJST TTL 34. CASH SALES 65. FOREIGN 2
4. NONTAX 35. CHECK SALES 66. FOREIGN 3
5. TAX1 SALES 36. R/A 1 67. FOREIGN 4
6. TAX2 SALES 37. R/A 2 68. DRAWER TTL
7. TAX3 SALES 38. R/A 3 69. PROMO
8. TAX4 SALES 39. P/O 1 70. WASTE
9. TAX1 40. P/O 2 71. TRAIN TTL
10. TAX2 41. P/O 3 72. MIX&MATCH
11. TAX3 42. HASH TTL 73. PLU LEVEL1 TTL
12. TAX4 43. AUDACTION 74. PLU LEVEL2 TTL
13. XPMT1 SALES 44. NOSALE 75. MOD1
14. XPMT2 SALES 45. CASH-IN-D 76. MOD2
15. XPMT3 SALES 46. CHECK-IN-D 77. MOD3
16. XPMT4 SALES 47. FD/S-IN-D 78. MOD4
17. %1 48. CHG1-IN-D 79. MOD5
18. %2 49. CHG2-IN-D 80. ROUND
19. %3 50. CHG3-IN-D 81. EATIN TTL
20. %4 51. CHG4-IN-D 82. TAKEOUT TTL
21. %5 52. CHG5-IN-D 83. DRTHRU TTL
22. NET SALE 53. CHG6-IN-D 84. TIP
23. CREDIT TAX1 54. CHG7-IN-D 85. BAL FORWARD
24. CREDIT TAX2 55. CHG8-IN-D 86. GUESTS
25. CREDIT TAX3 56. CHG1 SALES 87. P/BAL
26. CREDIT TAX4 57. CHG2 SALES 88. CHECKS PAID
27. FD/S CREDIT 58. CHG3 SALES 89. SERVICE
28. RETURN 59. CHG4 SALES 90. V.DINHEIRO
29. ERROR CORR 60. CHG5 SALES 91. VD SALES REC#
30. PREVIOS VD 61. CHG6 SALES
31. VOID MODE 62. CHG7 SALES

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 175


Clerk Report
The Clerk Report selection allows you to reprogram the descriptors that appear with the Clerk Report
totals and counters. For example, the first total on the clerk report "NET SALES" might be re-labeled
to say, "GROSS SALES". You can reprogram any of the Financial Report totals listed here with any
24-character descriptor.
1. From the MESSAGES screen, press 5 and CASH to display the CLERK REP MESG.
screen:
C L E RK RPT
1 . N ET SAL E
2 . N ON T AX
3 . T AX 1 SA L E S
4 . T AX 2 SA L E S
5 . T AX 3 SA L E S
6 . T AX 4 SA L E S

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select line and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
Financial Report line you wish to program.
3. After you have completed typing the descriptor, press CASH to accept the new message.
4. Continue to program additional Report message or press CLEAR to return to the
PROGRAM MODE screen.

176 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Default Clerk Report Messages
NO Description NO Description NO Description
1. NET SALE 35. R/A 3 69. GUESTS

2. NONTAX 36. P/O 1 70. P/BAL

3. TAX1 SALES 37. P/O 2 71. CHECKS PAID

4. TAX2 SALES 38. P/O 3 72. SERVICE

5. TAX3 SALES 39. HASH TTL 73. V.DINHEIRO

6. TAX4 SALES 40. CASH-IN-D 74. VD SALES REC#

7. TAX1 41. CHECK-IN-D

8. TAX2 42. FD/S-IN-D

9. TAX3 43. CHG1 SALES

10. TAX4 44. CHG2 SALES

11. XPMT1 SALES 45. CHG3 SALES

12. XPMT2 SALES 46. CHG4 SALES

13. XPMT3 SALES 47. CHG5 SALES

14. XPMT4 SALES 48. CHG6 SALES

15. %1 49. CHG7 SALES

16. %2 50. CHG8 SALES

17. %3 51. FOREIGN 1

18. %4 52. FOREIGN 2

19. %5 53. FOREIGN 3

20. CREDIT TAX1 54. FOREIGN 4

21. CREDIT TAX2 55. DRWR TTL

22. CREDIT TAX3 56. PROMO

23. CREDIT TAX4 57. WASTE

24. FD/S CREDIT 58. TRAIN TTL

25. RETURN 59. NOSALE

26. ERROR CORR 60. MIX&MATCH

27. PREVIOS VD 61. PLU LEVEL1 TTL

28. VOID MODE 62. PLU LEVEL2 TTL

29. CANCEL 63. ROUND

30. GROSS SALE 64. EATIN TTL

31. CASH SALES 65. TAKEOUT TTL

32. CHECK SALES 66. DRTHRU TTL

33. R/A 1 67. TIP

34. R/A 2 68. BAL FORWARD

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 177


SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 179
Datatran Message
Not Used
Note: The NR-500 series ECR’s provide Integrated Credit with EMV capable credit processing
equipment only. The Datatran Message programming is not utilized with EMV.

1. From the MESSAGES screen, press 6 and CASH to display the DATATRAN message
screen:
D A T AT R AN
1. 
2.
3.
4.

- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select line and press the CASH key to confirm.
3. Type in the desired message up to 4-lines x 32 characters per line. After you have completed
typing the descriptor, press CASH to accept the new message.
4. Continue to program additional DATARAN message lines or press CLEAR to return to the
PROGRAM MODE screen.

180 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Mix & Match Program
Retailers often offer discounts when multiples of different items are purchased. For example, the
offer: “save $5 on any three bottles of wine” can be handled by a mix and match discount. The NR-
500 Series can accommodate up to 99 (the exact number is determined by memory allocation)
different mix and match discounts.
This program sets the number of items that must be purchased to receive the discount and the amount
of the discount. You must also set the following additional Mix & Match Table options that are set
through separate programs:
• You can set a 24-character descriptor for the discount
• You must link eligible items to the appropriate mix and match table. See “PLU
Programming”; and go to Page 6, option #36 of the selected PLU options.

Mix & Match Name/Quantity/Price Settings


Each Mix & Match discount function can be programmed with a unique 24-character descriptor. The
number of Mix & Match discounts is set in memory allocation.
1. From the PROGRAM MODE screen, press 9 and CASH to display the MIX & MATCH
programming screen:
M I X & MAT C H

E N T ER MIX & M AT C H#
( 1 - 20 ) 0

2. Enter the number of mix and match you wish to program; Press CASH to confirm.
M I X & MAT C H
1 . D ES C : [D I S CO U NT 0 1 ] 
2 . Q UA N TIT Y [0]
3 . A MO U NT [0. 0 0 ]

- P A GE 1/1 -

3. The descriptor of Mix and match can be up to 24 characters. Press CASH to access. Type in
the desired descriptor; Press CASH to confirm.
4. Press the ↓ key to select the QUANTITY field; Press CASH to access. Enter the number of
items that need to be purchased to qualify for the discount; Press CASH to confirm.
5. Press the ↓ key to select the AMOUNT field, Press CASH to access. Enter the amount of the
discount; Press CASH to confirm.
6. Press the CLEAR key to return to the MIX & MATCH PGM screen. Select another Mix &
Match table to program or press the CLEAR to exit.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Program Mode Programming • 181


Program Scans
Since much time and energy has been invested in the planning and programming of your NR-500, it is
advisable to print a hard copy of the final program for future reference. This copy should be kept in a
safe place. (You can also save your program electronically, on a SD card. Go to “Program Backup
and Restore” on page 102 to use this method.)
1. From the PROGRAM MODE menu, press 10 and CASH for PGM SCAN. The
PROGRAM SCAN screen displays:
P G M S C AN
1 . P LU 
2 . G RO U P
3 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
4 . O PT I ONS
5 . E MP L OYE E
6 . T IM E SC H E DU L E
- P A GE 1/2 -

P G M S C AN
7 . T AX 
8 . M ES S AGE S
9 . M IX & M A T CH
1 0 . NL U CO D E #
1 1 . MA C RO

- P A GE 2/2 -

2. Press the ↑ key and the↓ key to select menu and press the CASH key to confirm. Select the
PGM SCAN. You can also select menu by page↑ key and page↓ key.

182 • Program Mode Programming SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Sample Reports

Financial
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
Total and count of all -------------------------------
Positive PLUs FINANCIAL

+PLU TTL 179.56


Total and count of all $288.60
Negative PLUs
-PLU TTL 10
-20.00
Total of +PLU and ADJST TTL 189.56
–PLU sales $268.60
-------------------------------
NONTAX $30.47
Total of Non- TAX1 SALES $153.60
taxable sales TAX2 SALES $11.92
TAX3 SALES $16.77
Total of tax eligible TAX4 SALES $31.89
sales for each sale tax TAX1 $10.00
TAX2 $1.21
TAX3 $1.18
Total of tax collected TAX4 $2.18
for each tax XMPT1 SALES $7.00
XMPT2 SALES $1.50
XMPT3 SALES $7.95
Total exempted XMPT4 SALES $7.50
sales for each tax ITEM DISC. 3
-0.48
SALE DISC. 2
Total and count for each % -5.22
function key SALE SURCH. 3
(i.e. discounts & coupons) $3.23
continued . . .

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Sample Reports • 183


continued from previous page
Total and count for each % % 4 0
function key $0.00
(i.e. discounts & coupons) % 5 0
$0.00
NET SALE 26
$281.18
Net Sales
CREDIT TAX1 4
-1.11
CREDIT TAX2 1
Credited tax for each tax. -0.23
(Tax is credited for CREDIT TAX3 2
negative taxable sales, -0.89
i.e. MDSE Return CREDIT TAX4 1
transactions.) -0.39
RETURN 33
-59.73
ERROR CORR 2
Total and count for -4.00
each type of PREVIOUS VD 1
transaction correction. -1.50
VOID MODE -2
-6.40
CANCEL 2
$16.00
Gross Sales
GROSS SALES $375.63
CASH SALES 13
Totals and counters for $133.49
CASH and CHECK CHECK SALES 1
sales $23.05
R/A 1 1
$145.00
R/A 2 0
$0.00
R/A 3 0
$0.00
P/O 1 1
Total and count for each type
-140.00
R/A (received on account)
and P/O (paid out) key. P/O 2 0
$0.00
P/O 3 0
$0.00
continued . . .

184 • Sample Reports SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Total and count of items continued from previous page
sold with HASH status. HASH TTL 0
$0.00
Count of No Sales. NOSALE 4
NON ADD # 547
Total of numbers entered CASH-IN-D 14
into the non-add key $269.99
CASH DEC AMT $269.99
OVER/SHORT $0.00
Total and count of expected CHECK-IN-D 3
CASH and CHECK in -108.45
drawer. Declaration CHECK DEC AMT $0.00
amounts and over/short OVER/SHORT -108.45
calculations. CHG1-IN-D 0
$0.00
CHG1 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
CHG2-IN-D 1
Total and count of expected
CHG2 DEC AMT $0.00
in drawer for each charge
OVER/SHORT $0.00
function. (Charge in
$8.43
drawer will differ from
charge sales if the charge is CHG3-IN-D 1
over-tendered $8.52
CHG3 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
CHG4-IN-D 2
-1.60
CHG4 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
CHG5-IN-D 1
$2.67
CHG5 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
CHG6-IN-D 2
$13.09
CHG6 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
CHG7-IN-D 0
$0.00
CHG7 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
CHG8-IN-D 1
$3.04
CHG8 DEC AMT $0.00
OVER/SHORT $0.00
continued . . .

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Sample Reports • 185


continued from previous page
CHG1 SALES 0
$0.00
Total and count for each CHG2 SALES 1
CHARGE key. $8.43
CHG3 SALES 1
$8.52
CHG4 SALES 2
-1.60
CHG5 SALES 1
$2.67
CHG6 SALES 2
Total for each Foreign $13.09
Currency in drawer. CHG7 SALES 0
$0.00
CHG8 SALES 1
$3.04
Total of CASH, FOREIGN 1 0.00
CHECKS and FOREIGN 2 0.00
CHARGES in drawer. FOREIGN 3 0.00
FOREIGN 4 0.00
DRWR TTL $216.69
Total and count for
PROMO and WASTE. PROMO 1
$1.50
WASTE 8
$12.50
Number of transactions and TRAIN TTL 5
total activity in Training Mode $62.59
MIX & MATCH 0 Mix & Match
$0.00 Discounts applied
EATIN TTL 1
$10.12
Total sales for each type
of destination TAKEOUT TTL 2
$40.77
DRTHRU TTL 1
Total and count of $3.04
balances entered into BAL FORWARD 4
PBAL key $88.13 Total number of
GUESTS 5 guests served
Total and count of P/BAL 4
Check Tracking $0.00
CHECKS PAID 2 Total and count of
balances paid
$18.64 all balances serviced
SERVICE 4
Total and count of items $88.13
serviced (stored checks) Average number of
AVG ITEM/CUST 7.29 items per customer,
AVG $/CUST $10.81 and average dollar
******************************** sales per customer
GRAND $375.63
CLERK 01 00209 00000
Grand total

186 • Sample Reports SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Time
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
--------------------------------
Time Period TIME

Number of Transactions 13:00-14:00


CNT 17
SALES AMT $183.85
Net sales in this period. SALES RATE 65.39%
14:00-15:00
Percentage of total sales CNT 9
SALES AMT $97.33
SALES RATE 34.61%
*******************************
Number of Transactions TOTAL CNT 26
all periods TOTAL AMT $281.18
Net sales in all periods.
CLERK 01 000209 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Sample Reports • 187


PLU
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
-------------------------------
PLU number ALL PLU

PLU Descriptor PLU#1


HAMBURGER
Count and sales total CNT 28 $42.00
SALES RATE 15.64%
PLU#2
Percentage of total sales
DBL BURGER
CNT 40 $99.75
SALES RATE 37.14%
PLU#4
COKE
CNT 26 $38.85
SALES RATE 14.46%
PLU#5
SPRITE
CNT 18 $13.42
SALES RATE 5.00%
PLU#7
ROAST
CNT 19.16 $30.47
SALES RATE 11.34%
PLU#28
UNLEADED
CNT 32.85 $39.39
SALES RATE 14.66%
PLU#29
RETURNS
CNT 10 -20.00
SALES RATE -7.44%
PLU#33
NAILS
CNT 15.55 $24.72
SALES RATE 9.20%
Total activity for all *******************************
PLUs TOTAL CNT 189.56
TOTAL AMT $268.60
Total sales for all
PLUs. CLERK 01 000209 00000

188 • Sample Reports SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Clerk
Note: Media totals can be printed for each clerk, if selected in “REPORT” of the
Options Programming.

07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
-------------------------------
Clerk Name ALL CLERK

Number of Transactions SUNNY


NET SALE 10
$155.23
Net sales for this clerk
DRWR TTL $109.81
-------------------------------
Drawer total for this clerk ZACH
NET SALE 5
$45.14
DRWR TTL $43.22
-------------------------------
ANNA
NET SALE 4
$78.75
DRWR TTL $67.03
-------------------------------
LAURA
NET SALE 2
$0.00
DRWR TTL $18.64
-------------------------------
PEGGY
-------------------------------
MOLLY
NET SALE 5
$2.06
DRWR TTL -22.01
-------------------------------

CLERK 01 000209 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Sample Reports • 189


Individual Clerk
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
-------------------------------
Clerk Name INDIVIDUAL CLERK

Number of Transactions SUNNY


NET SALE 10
$155.23
Net sales for this clerk DRWR TTL $109.81
-------------------------------

Drawer total for this clerk CLERK 01 000209 00000

190 • Sample Reports SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Groups
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
--------------------------------
Group Descriptor GROUP

Number of items #1: FOOD


sold in this group CNT 68
SALES AMT $141.75
Net sales for this group #2: DRINK
CNT 44
SALES AMT $52.27
#3: REST.
CNT 112
SALES AMT $194.02
#5: STORE
CNT 19.16
SALES AMT $30.47
#8: MDSE
CNT 58.40
SALES AMT $44.11
#9: STORE MDSE
CNT 77.56
SALES AMT $74.58
********************************
Number of items
sold in all groups. TOTAL CNT 189.56
TOTAL AMT $268.60
Net sales for all groups.
CLERK 01 000209 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Sample Reports • 191


Day
The Day (Daily Sales) report lists net sales for each day of the month.
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 2 REPORT 00001
-------------------------------
DAY
Count
DAY : 12
Net Sales CNT 2
SALES AMT $6.00
Percentage of total SALES RATE 50.00%
DAY : 12
CNT 2
SALES AMT $6.00
SALES RATE 50.00%
*******************************
TOTAL CNT 4
TOTAL AMT $12.00

CLERK 01 000209 00000

Stock
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
-------------------------------
PLU number ALL PLU STOCK

PLU Descriptor PLU#1


HAMBURGER
Current inventory count CNT 26
PLU#2
DBL BURGER
CNT 15
PLU#7
ROAST
CNT 25.96
PLU#28
UNLEADED
CNT 1488.47
PLU#33
NAILS
CNT 161.25

CLERK 01 000209 00000

192 • Sample Reports SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Check File
07/20/2015 MON 13:32

X 1 REPORT 00001
--------------------------------
OPEN CHECK
Open check number
and balance.
CHECK : 3 $24.07
MOLLY
CHECK : 4 $45.42
Clerk responsible SUNNY
for the check. CHECK : 5 $24.50
KELLY
CHECK : 6 $28.33
SUNNY

CLERK 01 000209 00000

Drawer Totals
07/20/2015 MON 13:32
X 1 REPORT 00001
-------------------------------
IN-DRAWER

Cash in drawer total CASH-IN-D $0.00


CHECK-IN-D $0.00
Check in drawer total CHG1-IN-D $0.00
CHG2-IN-D $0.00
CHG3-IN-D $0.00
Charge (1-8) in drawer totals CHG4-IN-D $0.00
CHG5-IN-D $0.00
CHG6-IN-D $0.00
CHG7-IN-D $0.00
CHG8-IN-D $0.00
CLERK 01 000209 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Sample Reports • 193


Balancing Formulas
+/- Net Sales $ Example
= PLU Sales Total $
+ Tax 1 $
+ Tax 2 $
+ Tax 3 $
+ Tax 4 $
+ Sale Coupon $
Amounts
+ Sale Percent $
Discounts
+ Sale Surcharge $
Amounts
= Net Sales $

+/- Gross Sales $ Example


= Net Sales $
+ Negative PLU Total $
+ Item Coupon Total $
+ Item Percent Discount $
+ Sale Coupon Amounts $
+ Sale Percent $
Discounts
+ Credit Tax 1 $
+ Credit Tax 2 $
+ Credit Tax 3 $
+ Credit Tax 4 $
+ Merchandise Return $
+ Void mode Total $
+ Mix & Match Total $
= Gross Sales $

194 • Sample Reports SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Integrated Payment Appendix

Introduction
This guide supports integrated payment applications utilizing EMV enabled Datacap equipment for
the SAM4s NR-500 ECRs. To implement the EMV application, the following is required:
1. For installations that will be using integrated payment, an SD card must be placed in the SD
card slot located in the ECR printer compartment during all EMV operations. (The card is
used to store transaction records so they can easily be called up by invoice number for tip
adjustment and/or voiding.)
2. Deploy your application with the latest EMV capable Datatran equipment, using either the
IPTran LT or the Tran Server with PDC’s. (Refer to the configuration diagrams that follow.
It is more cost-effective to use the Tran server and PDC configuration when your network
includes four or more NR-500 ECRs.)
3. For PIN-Pad/EMV reader, check with your provider for compatible devices.
4. When your configuration is completed and connected to an active Ethernet line, perform the
“Dial In Load” as shown on page 221 and then perform the “Parameter Download” as
described on page 219.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 195


What to Order?
Datatran Equipment Part Numbers
1900.20 – IPTran™ LT (applications with up to 3 ECRs)
1715.20 – New Style PDC (applications with 4 or more ECRs)
1900.50 – Tran Server (applications with 4 or more ECRs)
7871.01 – Serial Interface Cable DB9-M connection (Included)
7877.30 – Peripheral Adapter Cable (For PIN-Pad connection)

PIN-Pad
For EMV Installations, use a Pin-Pad recommended & approved by your provider. For example: the
Verifone Vx805 may be used with the certified version of XPI (8.42B).

VeriFone Part Numbers:


M280-703-A3-WWA-3 –VeriFone Vx805
PWR282-001-01-A – Power Cable
CBL282-031-02-A – Serial Interface Cable
Load XPI Application (Version 8.42B)
Processor Encryption (Specific to merchant installation)

196 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Configurations

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 197


Note: If you have an installation using 3 IPTran LT units as shown above, all three devices will have
a separate batch and work independent of each other (separate batching, separate reporting).

198 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


NOTE: If you have multiple PDC’s and a Tran Server as shown here, there is only one batch and it
can be controlled at any of the registers. PDC’s must have a connection to the internet.
Note: PDC’s are paired to a specific Tran Server. A PDC from one site will not work with the Tran
Server from a different site.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 199


Required ECR Program Settings

Define Port (Serial Port Options)


You must define one of the three serial communication ports for the DataCap device you will be
using for EMV.

Port Settings
1. At the SERVICE MODE, press 5 and CASH for RS232C programming. The port selection
screen displays:
D E F IN E PO R T
1 . P OR T 1
2 . P OR T 2
3 . P OR T 3
3 . U SB TYP E
5 . S CA N

- P A GE 1/1 -

2. Enter the digit (1-4) corresponding to the port you wish to program. Press the 5 and CASH
to print Port 1, Port 2, PORT 3 settings. The appropriate PORT PROGRAM screen
displays:
PORT 3
1 . B AU D RA T E [19 2 0 0]
2 . P AR I TY [N O N E]
3 . D AT A BI T S [8B I T S]
4 . S TO P BI T S [1 B I T]
5 . D EV I CE [D A TAT R A N]

- P A GE 1/1 -

3. Use the ↑ key and the ↓ key to scroll up and down through the eleven serial port options.
Make settings or changes as needed.
4. Press the CLEAR key to finalize and return to the DEFINE PORT screen.

Serial port Settings Screen Program Notes


# Option Description
1 BAUD RATE Select 19200 for EMV enabled DataCap devices
2 PARITY Select NONE
3 DATA BITS Select 8
4 STOP BITS Select 1
5 DEVICE FUNCTION Select EMV → then select DATATRAN

200 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


System Options
Options are organized into different categories, i.e. System, Print, Report, etc. to make it easier for the
programmer to find and set options. Specific System Options are required for Integrated Payment to
operate properly.
1. At the PROGRAM MODE, press 4 and CASH for OPTIONS Programming. The
OPTIONS screen displays:
O P T IO N S
1 . S YS T EM
2 . P RI N T
3 . R EP O RT
4 . T AX
5 . C UR R ENC Y
6 . R OU N DIN G
- P A GE 1/3 -

2. Press 1 CASH to select the “SYSTEM” options category.


3. Use the ↑ key and the ↓ key to scroll up and down through the options in the category. Press
the ↑ key and the ↓ key to choose the appropriate setting for the options.
4. Press the CASH key to confirm the option value and return system option screen.

EMV Related System Options

# System Option Entry Description


48 EFT DRAFT DATATRAN Select if the EFT draft is Fine Dining. Fine dining draft
FINE DINING will print a tip line. Select Datatran to not print tip line.
49 MSR CONNECT DATATRAN Select device where the card reader is connected; For
PDC EMV installations always select PDC.
50 PIN-PAD TYPE DUKPT Always choose PIN-Pad type as DUKPT.
ROTAT
51 PIN-PAD PORT 0-3 Select the port# where Pin-Pad is connected
52 COPY OF DATATRAN 0-99 Set desired number of EFT receipts to print
RECEIPT (default = 1)
53 MARK CARD No ON ALL Y or N Set to N to NOT print card number on EFT receipts.
EFT DRAFTS
54 “test” CLERK ID? Y or N Always set to N
55 CARDHOLDER NAME? Y or N Set to Y if you want the cardholder’s name printed on EFT
receipts.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 201


Function Key Programming
Program the appropriate Charge function keys that will be used to finalize electronic payment
transactions; Charge key function keys are key codes 323-330. Charge keys can be programmed as
Credit, Debit, Gift, Gift No NSF or Cash Benefit keys.
Charge keys must be assigned to the keyboard before programming the option settings.

Charge Key Programming


1. From the PROGRAM MODE, press 3 and CASH for FUNCTION KEY. The FUNCTION
KEY PROGRAM screen displays:
F U N CT I ON K E Y
1 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
2 . M AC R O K E Y

2. Press 1 and CASH to select FUNCTION KEY menu.


F U N CT I ON K E Y

E N T ER FUN C . KE Y
T O BE PRO G R AM M ED

3. Press the CHARGE key you wish to program.


4. Use the ↑ key and the ↓ key to scroll up and down through the options for the function key
you have selected. The pages that follow detail the reference information for each key.
5. Select option “14.SEND TO EFT” and press the CASH, press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to
select the option value to [Y], press the CASH to save the setting.
6. Select option “15.EFT PORT (0-3)” and press the CASH. Enter the port number where the
DataTran device is connected and press CLEAR to set the value and return to the charge key
programming.
7. Select option “17.SELECT CARD TYPE” and press the CASH. Use the ↑ key and the ↓
key to scroll up and down through the options until the correct card type is displayed. Press
the CASH to save the setting.
8. Select option “18.SHOW TIP ON” and press the CASH. Use the ↑ key and the ↓ key to
scroll up and down through the options until the desired option is displayed. Press the CASH
to save the setting
9. Press CLEAR to return to the FUNCTION KEY menu.
10. Press CLEAR again to return to the PROGRAM MODE menu

202 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Charge Key (1-8) Options
Option Entry Description
1 DESC Alpha You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors
numeric are CHARGE 1-8.
24 character
2 HALO 7-digit You can limit errors by setting the maximum amount that can
amount be tendered. "0" means that there is no entry limit.
3 AMOUNT TEND COMP. Y or N Select Y if you want to force the operator to enter the tendered
amount and let the register calculate the change.
4 OVER/UNDER TENDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender more than
IN MGR CONTROL the amount of the sale and issue change. When selected, over
tendering is allowed only in the MANAGER MODE.
5 DISABLE UNDER Y or N Select Y if you do not want the operator to tender less than the
TEND. amount of the sale.
6 DOES DRAWER OPEN Y or N Select N if you do not want the drawer to be opened with this
key.
7 ALLOW OVER TEND. Y or N Select Y if you wish to allow tender greater than the amount of
the sale.
8 NON-ADD # ENTRY Y or N Select Y if you wish to enforce the entry of a non-add number
COMPULSORY prior to tendering.
9- EXEMPT TAX 1 – TAX4 Y or N Select Y to exempt the appropriate tax automatically when
12 finalized with this key.
13 COMPULSORY Y or N Choose Y to enforce validation if an optional printer with
VALIDATION validation capability is connected to a Serial port.
14 SEND TO EFT Y or N Set to Y for integrated payment EFT/EMV operations.
15 EFT PORT (0-3) [0-3] Enter the port # where the integrated payment device is
connected.
16 ALLOW ROUNDING Y or N Select Y if you wish to allow rounding when pressing the
CHARGE 1~CHARGE 8 key. Always N for EMV
17 SELECT CARD TYPE [Card Type] None, Credit, Debit, Gift, Gift No NSF, Cash Benefit
18 SHOW TIP ON [Selection] REG
(See ** Note: below) PINPAD
PRINT TIP LINE ONLY

** Note: Before selecting charge key option 18 setting, determine the Transaction Type (type of card) and
when tips are to be entered:
• If the card is a CREDIT card, and the draft will be presented to the customer and the tip will be added
later from the TIP OPERATION function of the DATATRAN OPERATION menu, select (PRINT TIP
LINE ONLY).
• If the card is a CREDIT card, and all payments are made at a cashier station, choose (REG) to prompt
for tip entry on the ECR display; choose (PINPAD) to prompt for tip at the PIN-Pad.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 203


 Tips cannot be edited/added to Debit transactions after the sale.
 No TIP entry is allowed for GIFT Card transactions. Tips must be entered using a PLU prior to
finalization with a Gift Card.
 When using IPTran LT terminals at each register, tips must be entered at the terminal the transaction
was registered on.

Datatran Tip Key


Firmware versions supporting EMV provide DataTran TIP function key (key code 416) for entering
TIP’s in register mode. If your application is set for “Fine Dining” you can place this function on the
keyboard to speed up the TIP entry. The key can be programmable for manager control if desired.
1. Move the key to the P lock position to display the Program Mode menu.
2. Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to select “3.FUNCTION KEY” and press CASH or press 3
and CASH to display the FUNCTION KEY screen.
F U N CT I ON K E Y
1 . F UN C TIO N KE Y
2 . M AC R O K E Y

3. Press 1 and CASH to select FUNCTION KEY menu.


F U N CT I ON K E Y

E N T ER FUN C . KE Y
T O BE PRO G R AM M ED

4. Press the “DATARAN TIP” key to program the settings. Use the ↑ key and the ↓ key to
scroll up and down through the options for the “DATATRAN TIP” key.
5. Select an option and press the CASH to set that option value.
6. From the YES/No type option screen, Press the ↑ key and the ↓ key to scroll up and down
through the options until the desired option is displayed. Press the CASH to confirm the
option selection.

DataTran TIP Key Options


Option Entry Description
1 DESC Alpha numeric You can program a unique descriptor. The default descriptors are
24 character CHARGE 1-8.
2 Under manager control Y or N Select Y to allow TIP operations only in X position manager
mode.
3 SEND TO EFT Y or N Set to Y for integrated payment EFT/EMV operations.

204 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Load the EMV Parameters
After connecting the new EMV compatible Datatran device and PIN-Pad to the ECR and all the
required programming is completed, you must load the parameters for the devices. The IPTran LT
must be connected to the internet to load the parameters.
1. To load the Datatran device parameters perform the “Dial In Load” procedure as explained on
page 221 in this guide.
2. To load the PIN-Pad parameters perform the “Parameter Download” as explained on page 219
in this guide.

Integrated Payment/EMV Operations


Sample Transaction
Close the previous day’s batch before beginning a new sales day. A new batch is opened
automatically when the previous batch is closed.
1. Register a normal transaction. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The message
“WAITING FOR EFT” displays.
2. At the PIN-Pad the sale confirmation message displays:

SALE
$2.00 – OK?

3. Press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.


4. Insert the EMV card into the PIN-Pad. The PIN-Pad will display “PLEASE WAIT”, then
“DO NOT REMOVE CARD”, and then “PROCESSING”. When Complete, the
“APPROVED” message will display.
5. Remove the card from the PIN-Pad.
6. At the register, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE” will display.
7. Press CASH. The receipt and card draft are printed.
8. If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE”
displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 205


Sample Transaction Receipt (without tip)

Merchant and Customer Drafts (without tip)

MERCHANT ID: 19497801 DATE 11/06/2017 MON TIME 11:12


CLERK ID: test
PLU1 $2.00
SALE TOTAL $2.00
CHARGE1 $2.00
VISA ************0010 ------------------------------------------- -

ENTRY METHOD: CHIP SALE $2.00


DATE 11/06/2017 TIME: 11:12:12 VISA ************0010
INVOICE :6
INVOICE :6 REFERENCE : 1005
REFERENCE : 1005 AUTH CODE : 44277A
AUTH CODE : 44277A
------------------------------------------- -

AMOUNT USD$ 2.00 CLERK 1 No.000016 00000


========
TOTAL USD$ 2.00
MERCHANT ID: 19497801
APPROVED – THANK YOU CLERK ID: test
I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER SALE
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER) VISA ************0010
ENTRY METHOD: CHIP
DATE 11/06/2017 TIME: 11:12:12
X_______________________________
Card 01 Test INVOICE :6
REFERENCE : 1005
AUTH CODE : 44277A
APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit
AID: A0000000031010 AMOUNT USD$ 2.00
TVR: 0000008000 ========
IAD: 06010A03602000 TOTAL USD$ 2.00
TSI: F800
ARD; 00 APPROVED – THANK YOU
CVM; SIGN I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER
MERCHANT COPY AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________
Card 01 Test

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
ARD; 00
CVM; SIGN

CUSTOMER COPY

206 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Sample Credit Transaction Receipt (with PIN-Pad tip)
Charge key set to Show TIP on = PINPAD

Merchant and Customer Drafts (with PIN-Pad tip)

MERCHANT ID: 19497801 DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:16


CLERK ID: test
PLU1 $2.00
SALE TOTAL $2.00
CHARGE1 $2.00
VISA ************0010 ------------------------------------------- -

ENTRY METHOD: CHIP SALE $2.00


DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 10:16:41 VISA ************0010
INVOICE :7
INVOICE :7 REFERENCE : 1006
REFERENCE : 1006 AUTH CODE : 44287A
AUTH CODE : 44287A
------------------------------------------- -

AMOUNT USD$ 2.00 CLERK 1 No.000016 00000


TIP USD$ 1.00
========
TOTAL USD$ 3.00 MERCHANT ID: 19497801
CLERK ID: test

APPROVED – THANK YOU SALE


I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER VISA ************0010
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT ENTRY METHOD: CHIP
IF CREDIT VOUCHER) DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 10:16:41

INVOICE :7
X_______________________________ REFERENCE : 1006
Card 01 Test AUTH CODE : 44287A

AMOUNT USD$ 2.00


APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit TIP USD$ 1.00
AID: A0000000031010 ========
TVR: 0000008000 TOTAL USD$ 3.00
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
ARD: 00 APPROVED – THANK YOU
CVM: SIGN I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER
MERCHANT COPY AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________
CARD 01 Test

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
ARD: 00
CVM: SIGN

CUSTOMER COPY

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 207


Sample Credit Transaction Receipt (with Print Tip Only tip)
Charge key Show tip = Print Tip Line Only

Merchant and Customer Drafts (with Print Tip Only tip)

MERCHANT ID: 19497801 DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:16


CLERK ID: test
PLU1 $2.00
SALE TOTAL $2.00
CHARGE1 $2.00
VISA ************0010 ------------------------------------------- -

ENTRY METHOD: CHIP SALE $2.00


DATE 10/16/2017 TIME: 10:16:41 TIP $________
TOTAL $________
INVOICE :7 VISA ************0010
REFERENCE : 1006 INVOICE :7
AUTH CODE : 18117A REFERENCE : 1006
AUTH CODE : 18117A
AMOUNT USD$ 2.00
------------------------------------------- -

TIP USD$ ____________ CLERK 1 No.000016 00000

TOTAL USD$ ____________ MERCHANT ID: 19497801


CLERK ID: test

APPROVED – THANK YOU SALE

I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL VISA ************0010


AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER ENTRY METHOD: CHIP
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT DATE 10/16/2017 TIME: 10:16:41
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)
INVOICE :7
REFERENCE : 1006
X_______________________________ AUTH CODE : 44287A
Card 01 Test
AMOUNT USD$ 2.00

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit TIP USD$ ______________


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000 TOTAL USD$ ______________
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
ARD: 00 APPROVED – THANK YOU
CVM: SIGN
I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
MERCHANT COPY AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________
Card 01 Test

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
ARD: 00
CVM: SIGN

CUSTOMER COPY

208 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Manual Card Entry
If a credit card is not able to be read, we can manually enter the card information. Manual card entry
is allowed on Credit, Gift and EBT transactions if the reader is unable to read the card or for card not
present sales.
PIN Debit payments must be processed as card-present transactions – the card data must be
read by the card reader and cannot be manually entered. This is a card requirement, not a
function of the point of sale equipment.

1. Register a normal transaction. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The message
“WAITING FOR EFT” displays.
2. If the card will not read:
• At the PIN-Pad, press the red button.
• At the ECR press CLEAR once, the message “PRESS CASH FOR MANUAL
ENTRY” displays.
3. At the ECR, press CASH and go to the PIN-Pad to complete the sequence of card entries. At
the sale confirmation message:

SALE
$2.00 – OK?

4. Press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.


5. The message “ACCOUNT NUMBER” displays. Enter the card number and press the
GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.
6. The message “ENTER EXPIRY, DATE MMYY” displays. Enter the 4-digit card expiration
date in MMYY format and press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.
7. **The message “ENTER CVV” displays. Enter the CVV (card verification value as shown
on the reverse of the card) and press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad. See**Note:
8. **The message “ZIP CODE” displays. Enter the 5-digit zip code of the card holder and press
the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad. See**Note:
9. The message “CHIP CARD YES=OK?” displays. If the card is a chip card, press the
GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad; if the card is not a chip card, press the RED button.
10. When verification is complete, the PIN-Pad displays “APPROVED” and the draft is printed
at the ECR.
11. If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE”
displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 209


Note: Visa or MasterCard branded Debit cards used for PIN Debit may also be used like credit cards,
with just a signature. If a Debit card presented for a PIN Debit transaction fails to read, when the
CARD ERROR message appears, press CLEAR. You can now choose an alternative payment
method. Press the CREDIT function. Slide the same Debit card, if it fails to read again, select
CLEAR. The message “ENTER ACCT NO” displays. You can manually enter the account number
and complete the transaction. The merchant may pay different card fees for PIN Debit and signature
Debit transactions.

**Note: The option to require CCV number or Zip Code entry are set by the processor. Your
installation may not require this entry.

Merchandise Return
Complete the merchandise return transaction as you would a normal transaction. Press MDSE
RTRN prior to entering each returned item.
1. Register a normal transaction.
2. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The message “WAITING FOR EFT” displays on the
register:
3. At the PIN-Pad the message displays:

REFUND
$10.00 – OK?

4. Press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.


5. Insert the EMV card into the PIN-Pad. The PIN-Pad will display “PLEASE WAIT”, then
“DO NOT REMOVE CARD”, and then “PROCESSING”. When Complete, the
“APPROVED” message will display.
6. Remove the card from the PIN-Pad.
7. At the register, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE” will display.
8. Press CASH. The receipt and card draft are printed.
9. If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE”
displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.

210 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Sample Merchandise Return Receipt

Merchant and Customer Copy

DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:20


MERCHANT ID: 19497801
CLERK ID: test MDSE RETURN*********************
PLU1 -10.00
REFUND TOTAL -10.00
CHARGE1 -10.00
VISA ************0010 --------------------------------
ENTRY METHOD: CHIP SALE $10.00
DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 11:17:54 VISA ************0010
INVOICE :9
INVOICE :9 REFERENCE : 1008
REFERENCE : 1008 AUTH CODE : 079511
AUTH CODE : 079511 --------------------------------
CLERK 1 No.000019 00000
AMOUNT USD$ 10.00
=========
TOTAL USD$ 10.00 MERCHANT ID: 19497801
CLERK ID: test
APPROVED – THANK YOU
REFUND
I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER VISA ************0010
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT ENTRY METHOD: CHIP
IF CREDIT VOUCHER) DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 11:17:54

INVOICE :9
X_______________________________ REFERENCE : 1008
Merchant Signature AUTH CODE : 079511

AMOUNT USD$ 10.00


APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit =========
AID: A0000000031010 TOTAL USD$ 10.00
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000 APPROVED – THANK YOU
TSI: A800
CVM; SIGN I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER
MERCHANT COPY AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________
Merchant Signature

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: A800
CVM; SIGN

CUSTOMER COPY

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 211


Void Transaction
Transaction Void allows a transaction to be removed from the current batch and not reported to the
cardholder statement.
1. Turn the key lock to the VOID position.
2. Register a normal transaction.
3. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The message “SLIDE CARD” displays.
4. Swipe the card. The message “ENTER INVOICE NUMBER” displays.
5. Enter the invoice code printed for the transaction to be voided, press CASH. The message
“ORIG TRAN AMOUNT” displays.
6. Enter the total amount of the original transaction, press CASH. The message “WAITING FOR
EFT” will display on the ECR. The “VOID SALE” message will display on the PIN-Pad:

VOID SALE
$1.00 – OK?

7. Press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.


8. Insert the EMV card into the PIN-Pad. The PIN-Pad will display “PROCESSING”. When
Complete, the “APPROVED” message will display.
9. Remove the card from the PIN-Pad.
10. At the register, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE” will display.
11. Press CASH. The receipt and card draft are printed.
12. If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE”
displays. Tear off the printer paper, and press CASH to resume printing.

212 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Sample Void Transaction Receipt (without tip)

Merchant and Customer Drafts (without tip)

MERCHANT ID: 19497801 DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:22


CLERK ID: test
VOID MODE **********************
VOID SALE PLU1 -2.00
TOTAL -2.00
VISA ************0010 CHARGE1 -2.00
ENTRY METHOD: CHIP --------------------------------
DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 10:22:09 SALE -2.00
VISA ************0010
INVOICE : 13 INVOICE : 13
REFERENCE : 1010 REFERENCE : 1010
AUTH CODE : 44317A AUTH CODE : 44317A
--------------------------------
AMOUNT USD$ 2.00 CLERK 1 No.000023 00000
=========
TOTAL USD$ 2.00

APPROVED – THANK YOU MERCHANT ID: 19497801


CLERK ID: test
I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER VOID SALE
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER) VISA ************0010
ENTRY METHOD: CHIP
DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 10:22:09
X_______________________________
Merchant Signature INVOICE : 13
REFERENCE : 1010
AUTH CODE : 44317A
APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit
AID: A0000000031010 AMOUNT USD$ 2.00
TVR: 0000008000 =========
IAD: 06010A03602000 TOTAL USD$ 2.00
TSI: F800
CVM; SIGN APPROVED – THANK YOU

MERCHANT COPY I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL


AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________
Merchant Signature

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
CVM; SIGN

CUSTOMER COPY

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 213


Sample VOID Transaction (with tip)

Merchant and Customer Drafts (with tip)

MERCHANT ID: 19497801 DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:22


CLERK ID: test
VOID MODE **********************
VOID SALE PLU1 -1.00
TOTAL -1.00
VISA ************0010 CHARGE1 -1.00
ENTRY METHOD: CHIP --------------------------------
DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 10:25:13 SALE -1.00
TIP $________
INVOICE : 11 TOTAL $________
REFERENCE : 1009 VISA ************0010
AUTH CODE : 44306A INVOICE : 13
REFERENCE : 1010
AMOUNT USD$ 1.00 AUTH CODE : 44317A
--------------------------------
TIP USD$_________________ CLERK 1 No.000060 00000

TOTAL USD$_________________

APPROVED – THANK YOU MERCHANT ID: 19497801


CLERK ID: test
I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER VOID SALE
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER) VISA ************0010
ENTRY METHOD: CHIP
DATE 05/16/2017 TIME: 10:25:13
X_______________________________
Merchant Signature INVOICE : 11
REFERENCE : 1009
AUTH CODE : 44306A
APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit
AID: A0000000031010 AMOUNT USD$ 1.00
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000 TIP USD$_________________
TSI: F800
CVM; SIGN TOTAL USD$_________________

MERCHANT COPY APPROVED – THANK YOU

I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL


AMOUNT ACCORDING TO CARD ISSUER
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT
IF CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________
Merchant Signature

APPPLICATION LABEL: Visa Credit


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
CVM; SIGN

MERCHANT COPY

214 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


EMV Related Datatran Operations
All EMV related management functions take place with the control lock in the Z position. In this
way, only those with the correct key will have access to these operations.
The following Z-Mode menu selections are used in EMV related operations:
• Datatran Function
• Datatran Transaction
In the Pre-EMV environment Datacap stored some information at the DataTran device that allowed
the registers to run some reports, such as the local transaction report.
In the EMV environment Datacap is no longer storing information at the DataTran device so there are
no batch reports available at the ECR. The “Delete SD EMV File” operation should be performed
daily.
On the NR-500 we are storing some information on the approvals at the register (EMVBACK.txt
file). This is required to be able to perform “By Record” transactions. No credit card or customer
information is stored at the ECR.
Sample EMVBACK.txt file:

Currently, if a Local Transaction Report is run we print the information from the approvals in the
EMVBACK.txt file. However, this data should only be used for troubleshooting and should not be
relied upon as accurate reporting data.
For example, if you perform a sale for $1.00 and then perform a Void by Record Number of the same
transaction, you will have two transactions. The register is only printing the information from the
approvals.

Accessing Z-Mode Functions


1. Move the key to the Z keylock position to display the Z-Mode menu.
2. You can now use the ↓ and the ↑ keys to scroll up and down through the Z-Mode menu. Or,
if you already know the menu number of the X Mode function you with to perform, you can
enter the digit (1-6) directly.
The following Z-Mode functions are available:

Z M OD E
1 . Z R E POR T S
2 . R ES E T E . J
3 . R ES E T N O T F O UND P LU
4 . C ON N ECT S ER V ER
5 . D AT A TRA N FU N CTI O N
6 . D AT A TRA N TR A NSA C T IO N
- P A GE 1/1 -

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 215


Datatran Function
1. Move the key to the Z lock position to display the Z-Mode menu.
2. You can now use the ↓ and the ↑ keys to scroll up and down through the Z-Mode menu (or
press 5 and CASH) to select the Datatran Transaction menu with the first option displayed:
D A T AT R AN F U NC T ION
1 . I NI T IAL I Z E E FT
2 . C LO S E C U R R. BAT C H
3 . P AR A MET E R D O WNL O A D
4 . E MV EBT V OU C HER
5 . I SS U E T R A NS A CTI O N
6 . I SS U E B A T CH STA T U S
- P A GE 1/2

D A T AT R AN F U NC T ION
7 . D IA L IN L OA D
8 . D IA G NOS T I C

- P A GE 2/2

Datatran Function: Menu Operations


EMV related operations are shown in Bold below; Follow the summary table for details for each of
these processes.

Menu Item Operation


#
1. Initialize EFT Use this operation to initialize the PIN-Pad device.
2. Close Curr. Use this operation to close the current batch; a new batch is
Batch automatically opened.
3. Parameter Use to load the EMV parameters into the PIN-Pad.
Download
4. EMV EBT Used to Manually enter EBT transactions.
Voucher
5. Issue Currently, if a Local Transaction Report is run we print the information
Transaction from the approvals. However, this data should only be used for
troubleshooting and should not be relied upon as accurate reporting data.
6. Issue Batch Print the status for the current batch.
Status
7. Dial In Load This procedure must be done at each new installation to load the Datatran
device parameters.
8. Diagnostic Use to perform various diagnostics. Use only as requested by Datacap
support.

216 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Initialize EFT
Select Initialize EFT to verify communications and software version.
1. Move the key to the Z keylock position to display the Z-Mode menu.
2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 1 and CASH to initialize the EFT Device.

DATE 11/20/2017 THU TIME 16:15


List of Installed Networks ** LIST INSTALLED NETWORKS **

EMC --- --- --- Ver: 3.99 sl Software Version


CLERK1 000066 00000

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 217


Close Current Batch
You must close the batch daily as this procedure clears the EMV file stored on the SD card. If the
processor performs an ‘Auto Batch” you will need to perform the ‘Delete SD EMV File’ operation.

NOTE: After a batch is closed, a new batch is automatically opened for the next day.

1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.


2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 2 and CASH to initiate the Close Batch (Debit).
4. The message “WAITING RESP.” displays momentarily. When communication is complete,
the “LOCAL BATCH STATUS” report prints and the batch is closed. The message
“BATCH WAS CLOSED SUCCESSFULLY” prints.

Close Batch Receipt

DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:29

**** LOCAL BATCH STATUS ****

BATCH STATUS : OPEN


BATCH NUMBER : 0080
TRANSACTION CNT : 7
ITEM COUNT : 7
BALANCE AMNT : 16.00
FWD ITEM COUNT : *
FWD BALANCE AMNT: *

CLERK 1 000065 00000

DATE 5/05/2017 THU TIME 10:34

*** CLOSE CURRENT BATCH ***

BATCH NUMBER : 0080


NET AMNT SETTLED: 16.00
ITEM COUNT : 7

BATCH WAS CLOSED SUCCESSFULLY


CLERK 1 000097 00000

218 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Parameter Download
Used to load the EMV parameters into the PIN-Pad. Perform this after loading the Datacap device
(see “Parameter Download” on page 219).
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 3 and CASH to initiate the Parameter Download.
4. The message: “ARE YOU SURE” displays. Press the YES/NO key to select YES and then press
CASH.
5. At the register, the message: “WAITING FOR EFT” displays. At the PIN-Pad, the message
“LOADING” displays.
6. When complete the message: “LOAD SUCCESS” will display and print. The PIN-Pad will re-
initialize.
7. At the register, press CLEAR to complete the procedure.

EMV EBT Voucher


When the EBT/Tran equipment is not able to connect to the processing center and the customer is not
able to process EBT via the integrated system they would use this operation to manually enter the
EBT transaction.
1. The customer would need to call the processing center to get an approval for the transaction.
2. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
3. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
4. Press 4 and CASH to initiate the EBT Voucher.
5. At the prompt, Enter Amount on ECR and press CASH. (i.e. 500 CASH)
6. Enter the Auth. Code; enter the code on the ECR and press CASH.
7. Enter Voucher Number; enter the voucher number at the ECR and press CASH.
8. The PIN-Pad will display $5.00 OK? Press the green button on the vx805 to confirm.
9. At the prompt: Tap or swipe the Card, insert the chip card into the vx805.

Note: When entering the Auth. Code, you must use the three-digit alpha character code entry method.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 219


Issue Transaction
The Issue Transaction report summarizes the transactions in the EMVBACK.txt file.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 5 and CASH to initiate the Issue Transaction Report.

*** LOCAL TRANSACTION REPORT ***

INVOICE : 1
REFERENCE : 1001
AUTH CODE : 68971A
AMOUNT : 5.36
VISA ************0010
--------------------------------
INVOICE : 2
REFERENCE : 1002
AUTH CODE : 69398A
AMOUNT : 2.68
VISA ************6781
--------------------------------
INVOICE : 3
REFERENCE : 1003
AUTH CODE : 69400A
AMOUNT : 3.00
VISA ************6789
--------------------------------
INVOICE : 4
REFERENCE : 1004
AUTH CODE : 69404A
AMOUNT : 5.55
VISA ***********6750
--------------------------------
CLERK 1 000070 00000

220 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Issue Batch Status
The Local Batch Status Report also prints when a batch is closed.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 6 and CASH to initiate the Issue Batch Status.

DATE 05/16/2017 MON TIME 10:29

**** LOCAL BATCH STATUS ****

BATCH STATUS : OPEN


BATCH NUMBER : 0024
TRANSACTION CNT : 7
ITEM COUNT : 7
BALANCE AMNT : 116.00
FWD ITEM COUNT : *
FWD BALANCE AMNT: *

CLERK 1 000065 00000

Dial In Load
This procedure must be done at each new installation to load the Datatran device parameters. An
active Internet connection is required for this operation
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 7 and CASH to initiate the Dial In Load.
4. The message: “ENTER DEVICE ID” displays.
5. Enter the 6-digit serial number of the IP Tran or PDC. The device will call Datacap’s host PC and
load itself. This takes approximately 20 seconds. During the load the register will display:
“WAITING FOR EFT”.
6. When complete the message: “LOAD SUCCESS” will display and print. The Datacap device
load is complete.

After the Datacap device is loaded, you must load the PIN-Pad parameters; From the Z-Mode. See
the “Parameter Download” on page 219 for details.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 221


DataTran Diagnostic
Use only with Datacap Support as necessary to troubleshoot Datatran issues.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 5 and CASH to select the Datatran Function menu.
3. Press 8 and CASH; The message “DIAG NUMBER 0” will display.
4. Press the 0 key and then CASH to print a list of diagnostic options:

DATE 5/05/2017 THU TIME 10:34

*** DATATRAN SELF TESTS ***

1– IPTRAN VERSION
4– CREDIT MID SETTINGS
10- IP ADDRESS
11- DNS TEST
15- PARAM LOAD
40- EEPROM DATA
41- RESET SEQKUENCE NUMBER

CLERK 1 000096 00000

5. Reselect the Diagnostic option. The message “DIAG NUMBER” will again display.
6. Enter the number of the diagnostic test you wish to perform and press CASH. The report
will print.

222 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Datatran Transaction
1. Move the key to the Z keylock position to display the Z-Mode menu.
2. You can now use the ↓ and the ↑ keys to scroll up and down through the Z-Mode menu (or
press 6 and CASH) to select the Datatran Transaction menu with the first option displayed:

D A T AT R AN T R AN S ACT I O N
1 . V OI D SA L E B Y RE C NO
2 . V OI D RE F U ND BY R E C N O
3 . V OI C E A U T H
4 . Z ER O AU T H OR I ZAT I O N
5 . D EL E TE S D E M V F I L E

- P A GE 1/1 -

Datatran Transaction: Menu Operations


EMV related operations are shown in Bold below; Follow the summary table for details for each of
these processes.

Menu Item Operation


#
1 Void Sale by Use these operations to void transactions when the
Record Number card is not present. CAUTION: These voids will not
correct ECR sales totals (i.e. PLU sales) but will
maintain a total on the Financial Report. Use the
2 Void Refund by VOID mode operation at the ECR to perform
Record Number transaction voids that will correct the appropriate
ECR sales totals.
3 Voice Use to enter a voice authorized sale in to the batch.
Authorization
4 Zero Authorization Use this operation to verify a card is valid, activated,
not reported as lost/stolen.
5 Delete SD EMV This Operation will clear the EMVBACK.txt file
File stored on the SD Card.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 223


Void Sale By Record Number
You can void (remove from batch) any sales transaction that resides in the current batch.
Note: This operation does not adjust any other cash register financial totals or counters.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 6 and CASH to select the Datatran Transaction menu.
3. Press 1 and CASH to initiate the Void Sale by Record number.
4. Enter the invoice number; press CASH.
5. The Message “WAITING FOR EFT” displays. When the “COMPLETED” message displays
press CLEAR to complete the procedure.

Void Refund By Record Number


You can void (remove from batch) any returned (negative) transaction.
Note: This operation does not adjust any other cash register financial totals or counters.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 6 and CASH to select the Datatran Transaction menu.
3. Press 2 and CASH to initiate the Void Refund by Record Number.
4. Enter the record number; press CASH.
5. The Message “WAITING FOR EFT” displays. When the “COMPLETED” message displays
press CLEAR.

Voice Authorization
If electronic authorization is not approved and the merchant receives voice authorization, the
transaction can be entered into the batch with this operation.
Note: This operation does not adjust any other cash register totals or counters.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 6 and CASH to select the Datatran Transaction menu.
3. Press 3 and CASH to initiate the Voice Authorization.
4. Enter the sale amount and then press CASH.
5. Enter the approval code and then press CASH.
6. The draft prints and the sale is added to the batch.

224 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Zero Authorization
Use this operation to verify a credit card is active or not reported as stolen. To use this feature, you
must have a charge key setup to connect to the EFT and type set for credit. You must also have an SD
card installed.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 6 and CASH to select the Datatran Transaction menu.
3. Press 4 and CASH to initiate the Zero Authorization.
4. Register displays “PRESS CHARGE KEY”, press the credit card tender key.
5. ECR displays “WAITING FOR EFT”.
6. Insert card into PIN-Pad reader.
7. When verification is complete, a receipt will print on ECR.

Example Verification

VERIFY CARD

VISA ************0010
ENTRY MRTHOD: CHIP
DATE: 11/21/2017 TIME: 09:08:51

INVOICE: 7
REFERENCE: 7
AUTH CODE: 09855A

AMOUNT UDS$ 0.00


=====
TOTAL UDS$ 0.00

APPROVED – THANK YOU


I AGREE TO PAY THE ABOVE TOTAL
AMOUNT ACCOTDING TO CARD ISSUER
AGREEMENT (MERCHANT AGREEMENT IF
CREDIT VOUCHER)

X_______________________________

CARD 01 TEST

APPLICATION LABEL: VISA CREDIT


AID: A0000000031010
TVR: 0000008000
IAD: 06010A03602000
TSI: F800
ARC: 00
CVM: SIGN

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 225


Delete SD EMV File
Use this operation to clear the EMVBACK.txt file stored on the SD Card. This is the internally stored
data file that stores the Authorization Response messages that allows “By Record Number”
transactions. Specifically, the ‘Void Transaction by Record Number’ and ‘Gratuity Entry’.
This file should be cleared each day as we have a limited amount of space to hold the file and most
likely, “By Record Transactions” will take place on the same day as the original transaction. The
EMV File is cleared automatically when the CLOSE CURRENT BATCH command is performed.
Some sites are set to Auto Batch and some processors only allow Auto Batch. If Auto Batch is
utilized, this operation should be executed every day.
1. Turn the control lock to the Z position.
2. Press 6 and CASH to select the Datatran Transaction menu.
3. Press 5 and CASH to initiate the Delete SD EMV File.
4. Register displays “SUCCESS”.

Tip (Gratuity) Entry


When the Charge key option is set to “Print Tip Line Only”, Gratuities (tips) indicated by the
customer on the payment draft must be entered into the ECR before the batch is closed. These Tips
are entered using the Datatran Tip Key .
The processor must support “By Record” operations (Tokenization) to be able to use the Tip
(Gratuity) Entry.
 Tips cannot be edited/added to Debit transactions after the sale.
 No TIP entry is allowed for GIFT Card transactions. Tips must be entered using a PLU
prior to finalization with a Gift Card.
Settings for the DataTran TIP Key Options can be found on page 204. Tips entered here replace any
previous tip entered.
If the key is set for manager control, turn the key to X and select MANAGER OPERATION. If the
key does not require manager control, turn to the REGISTER MODE.
1. Press the Datatran Tip function key. The prompt “ENTER INVOICE NUMBER” is displayed.
2. Enter the invoice number of the transaction and press CASH. The prompt “ORIG TRAN
AMOUNT”. Enter the original transaction amount and press CASH.
3. The message now displays: “TIP AMOUNT”. Enter the tip amount and press CASH.
4. The message displays: “WAITING FOR EFT”. If the record number and transaction number are
valid, the tip amount is entered in the batch and a tip entry chit prints as shown below.

226 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Sample Tip Chit

11/21/2017 10:41 139


SALE $10.00
TIP $1.50
VISA ************0010
INVOICE : 139
REFERENCE : 1001
AUTH CODE : 43516A

APPROVED - THANK YOU

TIP Entry at Time of Sale


Alternately, if the charge key used to tender the sale is set to SHOW TIP ON: PINPAD; the customer
is prompted to choose to enter a TIP at the time of the sale.
1. Register a normal transaction. Press the appropriate CHARGE key. The message “WAITING
FOR EFT” displays.
2. At the PIN-Pad the message displays:

SALE
$2.00 – OK?

3. Press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad keypad.


4. At the PIN-Pad the message “ADD TIP?” displays:
ADD TIP?

YES
NO
5. Press the F3 button next to select YES to add a TIP; F4 to select NO TIP.
6. After pressing F3 the message “ENTER TIP + OK $ 0.00” appears.

ENTER TIP + OK
$ 0.00

7. Enter the TIP amount and press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad.

ENTER TIP + OK
$ 1.00

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 227


8. Verify the sale amount; press the GREEN button on the PIN-Pad.

SALE
$3.00 – OK?

9. Insert the EMV card into the PIN-Pad. The PIN-Pad will display “PLEASE WAIT”, then
“DO NOT REMOVE CARD”, and then “PROCESSING”. When Complete, the
“APPROVED” message will display.

APPROVED

10. Leave the card in the PIN-Pad; the receipt and the customer copy of the EFT draft will print
on the ECR. Remove the card from the PIN-Pad.
11. At the register, the message “PRESS CASH KEY” will display.
12. Press CASH; the merchant copy of the EFT draft will print and the and the PIN-Pad will
prompt “REMOVE CARD”

REMOVE
CARD

13. If multiple documents are to be printed, the message “PRESS CASH TO CONTINUE”
displays. Tear off the current receipt. Press CASH to issue the next receipt.

228 • Integrated Payment Appendix SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Important Notes:

• Close Batch or Delete SD EMV File needs to be performed every day at the register even
when the site is set for auto batch with their processor. This is how Sam4s clears the EMV
token file. The token file is used to allow for “By Record” transactions (such as Void and
Gratuity entry).
• PIN-Pad is customer facing…. There is no indication to cashier what the end-user is doing
(or not doing).
• Debit cards with EMV chip - Since Datacap \ mercury do not currently support EMV Debit,
all EMV Debit cards are forced to be inserted and are then processed as regular credit
cards. This usually means a higher rate for the merchant on transactions over $25.
• Time outs cannot be configured at the VeriFone vx805. Some say they are too short, other
say they are too long… cannot configure at register.
• Consolidated Reports: If an end-user wants consolidated reporting they must use the
configuration with Tran server (even if only two registers in their system).
• PDC’s are paired to a specific Tran Server. The PDC from one site will not work with a
Tran server from a different site.

Note: Cannot suppress the signature line. In the Non-EMV environment a flag was added to the
registers: “NO SIGNATURE IF TRANSACTION IS UNDER $xx”. When this flag was set, the
register would not print the signature line if the transaction was under the configured amount (usually
set at $25). With the EMV integration, the register receives the receipt data from the Datacap device
and the signature line is included in the receipt data … therefore, it cannot be controlled at the
register.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Integrated Payment Appendix • 229


Glossary

Activity Count
The activity counter increments each time an entry is made on a particular PLU, or function key. The
counter prints on the appropriate reports.

Cancel
Press the CANCEL function to abort a transaction in progress. All current items are removed
(voided).

Cash Declaration
This option forces the operator to count the cash drawer and input the results before the financial
report can be taken. Absentee owners may want clerks or managers to declare the drawer counts to
ensure that all cash is deposited, regardless of overages, or shortages. As an added benefit, the
overage or shortage amount is calculated and printed on the financial report.

Clerk
Sales clerks are individuals who are responsible for selling the merchandise to the customer.
Typically, management wants to know merchandise sales levels for each clerk, in order to monitor
productivity, account for cash and other media, and/or pay commissions. The default program
provides operation for 15 clerks, however up to 99 different clerks can used by changing the default
memory allocation.
Compulsory
When an operation is programmed compulsory, the appropriate entry must be performed in order to
complete the operation.

Compulsory Amount Tendering


This forces the operator to input the tender, rather than pressing a payment key directly. The change
will always be computed by the register when a customer tenders an amount greater than the total
due. Compulsory tendering will reduce cashier change errors.

Compulsory Condiment
When a kitchen printer, or requisition system is used, the merchant may wish to force the entry of a
condiment or instruction for specific items. If compulsory condiment status is set for a specific PLU,
then a condiment PLU must follow the entry of the item.

230 • Glossary SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Compulsory Drawer
With compulsory drawer enabled, the clerk cannot begin a new transaction until the drawer is closed.
This simple feature was designed to teach cashiers the habit of closing the cash drawer after each
transaction. You’ll reduce potential errors, theft and fraud that can take place when your cashier
works out of an open drawer.

Compulsory Number Entry


This option forces the operator to enter a reference number (using the #/NS key) before a PLU entry
can be made or a transaction finalized with a Charge key. The number could represent an SKU
number that would be tracked manually, or other data such as a customer count.

Consecutive Number
A sequential number is printed on each receipt issued. This is not a “customer count” as this number
is incremented for non-sales activity such as no-sales and reports. A count of revenue generating
transactions (true customer count) is printed with the Net Sales total on the financial report.

Currency Conversion
Use the currency conversion function to convert and display the value of the transaction in foreign
currency. Only cash tender is allowed after pressing the currency conversion function. Change is
calculated and issued in home currency.

Decimal Multiplication
If you sell weighed goods, yard goods, or any merchandise sold in fractions of a unit, the decimal
multiplication feature calculates each transaction quickly and accurately. For example, if your
customer selects 4.75 pounds of an item sold at $1.59 per pound, you enter 4.75 on the numeric
keypad, press the X/TIME (multiplication) key, then enter the price per pound and press the
appropriate PLU key.

Default Program
The default program is the original program installed in the NR-500 Series. The register has a default
program which makes it operational after a memory clear. Nearly all options, rates and status
programs are set to zero as the default condition.

Department
The NR-500 Series uses price look-ups (PLU’s) to perform the function of traditional cash register
departments. PLU’s may be registered directly on the keyboard (like traditional departments) or
indirectly by entering the item or PLU number and then pressing the PLU key.

Electronic Journal
The NR-500 Series provide a traditional journal printer. Today many systems, even expensive PC-
based systems do not print a traditional sales journal. For business records, a copy of daily financial
summaries is usually all that is needed. Like some of the more expensive POS systems, the SAM4S
NR-500 Series have the capability of storing a sales journal in memory. The electronic journal can be
reviewed and discarded, saved to an SD card or polled by a PC for archival. When ECR memory
reserved for electronic journal is full, current records are saved and old data is discarded.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Glossary • 231


Error Condition
An error condition signals that mis-operation has occurred. It is identified by an audible tone and an
error descriptor appearing on the display.

Error Correct
An error correct operation voids the last item entered, it must be used within a sale.

Flash ROM
Flash ROM is used by the manufacturer to contain the program that runs the register. Flash ROMs
maintain memory when power is off, allowing the register to be especially stable and reliable. When
the register’s program is improved, or updated, the Flash ROM can be updated by a qualified service
technician through a utility in the register.

Gallonage
To simplify gasoline transactions, PLU’s can be designated to calculate gallons sold on fuel
purchases. The price of the fuel sold is entered as it would be in a normal “open” PLU. However, the
price per gallon of fuel is entered where the PLU preset price is normally maintained. When fuel is
sold, the register will refer to the programmed price per gallon and calculate the number of gallons
sold. Both the gallons pumped and dollar amount of the gas purchase are conveniently printed on the
customer receipt and sales journal. This provides all the necessary information for a customer that
needs a receipt for gas purchases. The total of gallons sold is also maintained on the appropriate PLU
report, in the place of the PLU item counter. Several gallonage PLU’s could be placed on the
keyboard to maintain records for different pumps, or types of fuel. Thus, the dollar and gallon totals
can provide a useful security check against separate pump totals.

Groups (PLU Groups)


Groups are used to organize sets of items. For example, in a restaurant Grill Items, Drinks, and Ice
Cream items might be separated into different groups. Up to 99 group totals are available. Group
reporting is available on the group report.

HALO
The high amount lock-out (HALO) limits the amount allowed to be entered in a PLU, or function key.

HASH
Merchants often sell non-merchandise items, such as lottery tickets, or bottle deposits, that they do
not wish to account for as reportable revenue. HASH PLU’s are useful to account for non-revenue
income. They will add to the appropriate totals on the PLU report, they will add to the transaction
totals, and they will be accountable for in drawer totals, but they will not affect the merchants, NET
SALES, GROSS SALES or NON-RESETTABLE GRAND TOTAL. As a system of options
programming, HASH can be defined to not add to the transaction (NON-ADD).

Link (PLU Link)


Use linked PLU’s if you wish the registration a PLU to automatically cause the registration of another
PLU (for example to automatically add a bottle deposit.) Linked PLU’s are set with Program 350,
PLU Link programming.

232 • Glossary SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Macro
Macro keys may be programmed to record, and then later perform, up to 50 keystrokes.

For example, a macro key could be set to tender (preset tender) a common currency, such as $5 into
the cash key.

Memory Allocation
Memory allocation is a program that determines how the system memory is divided to provide the
correct features for your application. For example, you may require more or less clerk memory,
PLU’s, or electronic journal memory. Memory allocation allows you to maximize the features you
need while minimizing the features you do not need.

Mix & Match


Retailers often offer discounts when multiples of different items are purchased. For example, the
offer: “save $5 on any three bottles of wine” can be handled by a mix and match discount. The
default NR-500 Series can accommodate up to 10 different mix and match discounts, the total can be
increased to a maximum of 100 through memory allocation.

Multiple Receipts
In some cases, for example where a mail-in rebate is offered, an extra copy of a receipt is needed. If
allowed, the receipt must be re-printed immediately, before another transaction is started.

Negative PLU’s
As you program PLU’s, you will find a setting to make them negative (normally they are positive).
Positive PLU’s are used for items that add to the sale. Negative PLU’s are used for items that subtract
from a sale, like individual store coupons or bottle deposit credits.

NLU
Number Look-Up (NLU) refers to PLU code that is accessed when a Keyboard PLU is used. In the
default program each Keyboard PLU will look up the appropriate numeric PLU, beginning with PLU
#1 for Keyboard PLU key #1 and continuing sequentially through the keyboard.
However, this numbering sequence may be impractical for some applications. For example,
Keyboard PLU #1 may represent a can of Diet Pepsi. The merchant may wish to have the Keyboard
PLU look up the UPC code number for Diet Pepsi, which is “120500”. Using this program, you can
change the Number Look-Up (NLU) for the keyboard PLU to any 14-digit number you choose.

No Sale
No sale is an operation to simply open the cash drawer. No sales are counted and reported on the
financial report.

Not Found PLU


For small merchants, the NR-500 Series can build a PLU file “on the fly”. Each time an
item is scanned (or entered by PLU number) that is not in the PLU file, the operator is
prompted to enter the price and other options for the item. At the end of the day, the “Not
Found PLU Report” will allow the manager to verify the prices and update the PLU file as
needed.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Glossary • 233


Open (PLU)
Open PLU’s accept price entries, rather than register a preset price. To prevent errors, you may set a
high limit (HALO) for open entries.

Override
Override is an operation used to bypass a programmed price or entry limit (HALO).

Over-Tendering/Under-Tendering
When a payment is made less than the amount due, it is called an under-tender. After an under-
tender, the register calculates and displays the remaining balance for the sale. Additional payments
must be made until the total due is satisfied. When the sale is fully paid, the cash drawer will then
open and the receipt is completed. When a payment is made more than the amount due, it is called an
over-tender. The register will compute and display the change due and the receipt will be completed.
Note that register options can be set to allow or disallow over-tendering for check and charge
payments.

Paid Out
The Paid Out key is used to track cash paid out of the cash drawer or to record pick ups from the cash
drawer.

PLU’s
Price look-ups (PLU’s) are accessed by indexing a code number and pressing the PLU key, or by
pressing a keyboard PLU key. PLU’s can be programmed with a preset or open price. PLU’s record
an activity count and dollar total on the PLU report. PLU sales may also report to a group.

Post Tender
Post tendering is available to help prevent cashier confusion when a customer decides to change the
tender amount. When Post Tendering is allowed, the operator can re-enter a cash tender and the
register will re-calculate the change.

To post tender after finalizing the sale, enter the cash amount presented by the customer and then
press CASH. The amount of change due to the customer is then displayed. This is a calculation
function only, and no totals or counters are updated by the use of this feature.

Preamble/Postamble Message
Programmable messages allow each merchant to customize his receipt with the store name, address,
phone number, website or other critical identification information or advertising messages. The
SAM4S NR-500 Series allows a preamble message of up to six lines, each with up to 32-characters,
to be printed at the top of each receipt. A postamble of up to 6-lines of 32-characters can also be
printed at the bottom of the receipt. (3 Inch Printer 48 characters)

Preset (PLU)
When a PLU is pre-programmed, or pre-set with a fixed amount, the preset amount will automatically
register when the PLU is pressed or entered.

234 • Glossary SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Preset Override
When a PLU is preset, it is possible to override the preset price with a different price. If the override
function is set to be allowed in the PLU program, you can simply enter a new price and press the PLU
key.

Receipt
A receipt is a printed tape given to a customer as a record of the sale transaction.

Received on Account
The Received On Account key is used to track cash received into the cash drawer or to record loans to
the cash drawer.

Register Number
The number of the register can be set and printed on each receipt. If the merchant uses more than one
register, or has more than one location, the register where a transaction took place or report was taken
is easily identified.

Single Item
The transaction is finalized automatically when a single item PLU is registered as the first item in a
sale. Single item status is used to speed transaction entry when an item is normally sold in a one-item
sale, for example, a pack of cigarettes, a newspaper or an admission ticket.

Split Pricing
Often merchants price items in multiples, for example 3 for $1. The register will compute the price of
items when the exact quantity is not purchased. If the customer chooses to buy 2 items at 3 for $1,
enter 2, press the X/TIME key, enter 3, press the X/TIME key and then enter the price and the PLU.
The register will compute the price for the items purchased.

Stock (PLU Stock)


Each PLU reports an activity counter. Normally the activity counter increments (adds) and is reset
when a PLU Z-report is taken. You can choose to use the PLU activity counter as a stock counter. If
used as a stock counter, each PLU activity will reduce the count. A separate program allows you to
add to the stock count or enter a new stock count. Stock counts are not reset when PLU Z-reports are
taken.

Surcharge (Item)
An item percent surcharge adds a percentage to the price of an item. This addition nets the PLU total.

Surcharge (Sale)
A sale percent surcharge adds a percentage to the entire sale.

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Glossary • 235


Tax Computation by Rate/Tax Computation by Table
In the simplest method of tax calculation, the register is set with a tax rate (or rates) and the taxes
are computed by a percentage calculation. In some cases, a tax that is entered as a percentage does
not follow exactly the tax charts that apply in your area (even if the tax chart is based on a
percentage). In these cases, we recommend that you enter your tax using tax table programming.
This method will match tax collection exactly to the break points of your tax table.

Tax Exempt
Tax exempt is used to exclude the tax from an entire sale.

Tax Shift
Tax shift keys are used to reverse the tax status of a PLU entry.

Tender
A tender is the register operation in which the amount of the payment is entered. If the tender
exceeds the amount due, the sale is finalized and change due is displayed.

Training Operation
Training operations do not add to PLU or function key totals. This allows an operator to practice
making entries without updating sales totals. If you wish to perform training operations, designate
one of the clerks for training. You must clear (Z) the register before the training clerk can be used.
When that clerk is signed on, the register is in “training mode”.

Transaction Number
See consecutive number.

VAT
Value-Added Tax (VAT) is a tax collection system where a portion of the item’s sale price is tax.
VAT is different than most sales taxes where tax amounts are calculated and added-on to the sale.
Value added taxes are included in the item price.

Void
A void operation will erase a previous item entry. It must be used inside of a sale only.

X & Z Reports
X (eXamine) reads reports without resetting and Z (Zero) reads and resets your sales totals.

236 • Glossary SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11


Manual Revision Record

Date
Edition Revision Contents:
Published
v0.1 07-20-2015 Initial Publication
v1.0 4/26/2018 Updated content; added Integrated Payment Appendix
Corrected page/table errors; Added Self-Test Operations,
v1.1 5/3/2018
Function Key Codes
v1.2 8/14/2018 Updated Stock Entry
v1.3 9/25/2018 Corrected Endorsement Message programming
v1.4 9/26/2018 Updated Integrated Payment information
Corrected System Option Table; Edited Program Backup &
v1.5 10/2/2018 Restore Added: S-Mode Help Menu information; Removed
duplicate LCD Display information
Updated X REPORTS (removed Flash report; added Open Table)
v1.6 11/1/2018
Added: report message tables, Datatran message program
v1.7 1/7/2019 Updated Logo
Updated Keyboards; added notes for optional Spooler, Datatran
v1.8 2/27/2019
Message
v1.9 6/4/2019 Updated Scale Key: Allow Dollar Entry on Scalable Item
Corrected keyboards; updated system options #53: Disable EFT
v1.10 6/7/2019
Amount Confirmation
v1.11 7/3/2019 Corrected screen errors

SAM4S NR-500 Series Manual v1.11 Manual Revision Record • 237

You might also like